JP2021053136A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an attention degree to a game suitably.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that a first specific performance is provided as one of operation corresponding performances corresponding to an operation of a performance button unit 40 provided on a front door frame 14. In a game round related to a first specific performance, at timing at which a variable display mode of patterns on a display screen of a pattern display unit is shifted to ready-to-win display, a form of the performance button unit 40 is switched from a first form in which an operation stroke is relatively short, to a second form in which the operation stroke is relatively long. In a performance after ready-to-win display shift, the performance is divided into first to third parts, and an operation suggestion for suggesting an operation of the performance button unit 40 to a player, sometimes the operation suggestion is generated in the first part, sometimes the same is generated in the second part, and sometimes the same is generated in the third part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a pattern is displayed. The variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the game machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A migration determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined migration information, and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The game state transition means to be made to
An operating means provided on the front of the game machine and operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation valid period.
The effect executing means is
A switching means for switching the form of the operating means from the first form to a second form having a different appearance from the first form when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied.
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the form of the operating means is switched to the second form, the operation suggesting means for suggesting the operation of the operating means to the player and the operation suggesting means during the predetermined operation valid period and said It has a means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated in the situation where the operation means is the second form.
A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the predetermined waiting period is provided.
The effect executing means is characterized by having a period setting means for setting any one of the different plurality of periods as the predetermined waiting period based on the determination result by the transition determination means.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view of an inner frame. It is a front view of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the rear. It is a rear view of the inner frame. It is a rear view of a game machine. It is a front view of the back pack unit. It is a front view of the front door frame. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the top lamp portion, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of light effect. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the top lamp part disassembled for each main structure. (A) is a schematic view showing a light irradiation state at a low speed rotation, and (b) is a schematic view showing a light irradiation state at a high speed rotation. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the front door frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 15 (a). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process of a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on a game production. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for variation. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a flowchart which shows (a) the command correspondence processing for hold display control by MPU of a display control apparatus, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the state of hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for hold notice effect by MPU of the notification / effect control device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the types of hold icons, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the notice effect. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the type 1 notice effect, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the outline of the type 2 notice effect. It is a perspective view which looked at the front door frame from the front. (A) A perspective view of the effect button device as viewed from the front of the game machine, and (b) a side view of the effect button device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the effect button device disassembled for each main configuration. It is a perspective view of the effect button device in a state where the side cover is omitted. It is a partial breakage figure of the effect button device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the operation block disassembled for each main structure. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the button unit disassembled for each main structure. Main configuration of the button unit It is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the operation block. (A) is a perspective view of the operation block in the operating state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating block in the operating state. It is a perspective view of the effect button device which is the 2nd form. It is a perspective view which shows the lift mechanism. (A) A perspective view of the rotor and (b) a plan view of the power transmission mechanism. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lift mechanism in the first form, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lift mechanism in the second form. (A) is a schematic view showing the movement of the lift mechanism at the time of switching from the first form to the second form, and (b) is a schematic view showing the movement of the lift mechanism at the time of switching from the second form to the first form. (A) is a side view of the effect button device in the first form, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device in the case of the first form. (A) is a side view of the effect button device in the second form, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device in the second form. (A) is a side view of the effect button device in the case of the third form, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect button device in the case of the third form. It is the schematic which shows the flow of operation in the case of the 1st form. It is the schematic which shows the flow of operation in the case of the 2nd form. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variation display mode and the jackpot expectation degree, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the 1st special effect executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the effect pattern and the start timing of an operation suggestion. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for super reach A, B. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for super reach C. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special effect processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the 1st special effect A. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the 1st special effect C. The schematic diagram which shows the movement of the effect button device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the position of the operation button and the detection position. (A) is a schematic diagram for supplementing the display flow during reach display, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the types of effects added to the character. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect level and the trigger for changing the effect level, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the update pattern of the effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of the 1st special effect for 2nd part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of the cooperation display. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the 1st special production in the 2nd part. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the 1st special production in the 2nd part. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the type of the 2nd special effect and the interlocking object. It is the schematic which shows the light emitting part of the annular illumination part and the movable effect device. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the position of the operation button and the detection position. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of the 2nd special effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the shift pattern of the notification target and the light emission target. It is the schematic which shows the shift pattern when the 2nd special effect A is executed. It is the schematic which shows the shift pattern when the 2nd special effect B is executed. It is the schematic which shows the shift pattern when the 2nd special effect C is executed. It is the schematic which shows the shift pattern when the 2nd special effect D is executed. (A) is a schematic view showing the division of the position of the operation button in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the protrusion amount and the generated torque. It is the schematic which shows the outline of the 3rd special production. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd special effect processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd special effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the torque change processing. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the 3rd special effect occurs. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the 3rd special production. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the 3rd special production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the type of jackpot and the display mode in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing an outline of display in the second display mode, and (b) is a schematic view showing an outline of display in the third display mode. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a display mode and a variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th special effect processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 3rd normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the operation correspondence processing for the 3rd normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd normal game state. It is the flowchart which shows the operation correspondence processing for the 2nd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the 4th special production. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the 4th special production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate members on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed on the island equipment of the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment such as a game hall.

The outer frame 11 supports the game machine main portion 12 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11 are fixed. The lower support metal fitting 18 is fixed to the connecting portion with. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 on the left side and the right side. Is rotatable forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the tip side of rotation.

A detection sensor for detecting the opening / closing of the game machine main portion 12 is provided in the upper right portion of the outer frame 11, specifically, the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the right frame portion, and the detection information from this detection sensor. The opening of the game machine main unit 12 is monitored based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main portion 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. It includes a unit 15 (see FIG. 3). The inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the front door frame 14 rotates with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side in front view. It can rotate forward as the tip side. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to an end portion of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the back pack unit 15 rotates on the left side when viewed from the front. It is possible to rotate backward with the moving base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side.

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a cover body attached to the front surface of the frame body 20 and provided with various decorations. It is mainly composed of 21 and covers almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 22 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the central portion of the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. The portion 22 is covered by the glass unit 30 from the back side of the front door frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 2, the frame body 20 is formed with a glass unit installation portion 23 so as to surround the window portion 22. Specifically, the glass unit installation portion 23 is arranged on the back side of the frame body 20 and is recessed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the window portion 22 is arranged at the bottom thereof. The glass unit 30 is fitted into the glass unit installation portion 23 to regulate displacement in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The glass unit 30 includes a pair of front and rear glass panels 31 having transparency, and a glass holder 32 for holding the glass panels 31. The glass holder 32 has an annular frame portion formed along the window portion 22, and the glass panel 31 is housed in a region surrounded by the frame portion.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 (specifically, the cover body 21) is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps that emit light according to the game situation. The light emitting means is composed of an annular illumination unit 24 having a light emitting body such as an LED built in along the peripheral edge of the window unit 22. Further, in the upper left and upper right corners of the front door frame 14, speaker units 27 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 22 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 28 and a lower bulging portion 29 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. The upper bulging portion 28 is provided with an upper plate 33 which is open upward, and the lower bulging portion 29 is provided with a lower plate 34 which is also opened upward. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33.

An effect button device 40 manually operated by the players is provided at a portion of the upper bulging portion 28 that is in front of the upper plate 33 (storage area of the game ball). The effect button device 40 is an operation device for the player to give a predetermined instruction in the process of progress of the game for the purpose of performing a predetermined effect on the display screen or the like of the symbol display device described later.

A game ball launch handle 45 is provided at a position side by side with the lower bulging portion 29 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 45, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. A receiving portion 53 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 50, and the front door side upper plate passage is formed by partitioning the receiving portion 53 to the left and right by a partition wall 54. An entrance portion and an entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side are formed. The upper plate passage on the front door side and the lower plate passage on the front door side lead to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls entering the upper plate passage on the front door side are guided to the upper plate 33 and lower on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, in FIG. 4, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted as in FIG.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 60 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 4) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. Further, bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 1) on the back surface of the front door frame 14 in correspondence with the inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72. Shafts are formed on the inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72, and the front door frame 14 is formed with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting these shaft parts into the bearing holes of the bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 of the front door frame 14. It is rotatably supported. That is, these inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 and bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door hook members 76 extending toward the front door frame 14. Corresponding to these front door hook members 76, a plurality of hook receiving members 59 extending toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (see FIG. 2). By hooking the front door hook member 76 on the hook receiving member 59, the front door frame 14 is locked in a closed state. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the game machine main portion 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the lower right corner of the inner frame base body 60. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75, and its tip portion (keyhole portion) is exposed in front of the pachinko machine 10 through a hole provided in the front door frame 14. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key to the left unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11. ..

A storage recess 61 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in a substantially central portion on the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. The accommodating recess 61 is recessed behind the pachinko machine 10 to form an accommodating space for accommodating the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 60 fits into the accommodating space. It is in a state.

The game board unit 80 is provided on the front side of the game area PE on which the game ball flows down and on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and the game area forming body 80a, and various game parts (for example, variable display unit, control) described later. The device, the movable effect mechanism, the decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b, which is mounted on the base body 251. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front surface portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As described above, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 30 (specifically, the rear glass panel 31). In the glass unit 30, the gap between the rear glass panel 31 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in the front and back at the same place. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board unit 80, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear. In FIG. 6, the configuration that can be visually recognized through the game area forming body 80a is also displayed by a two-point difference line, and is in a state close to the appearance when the game board unit 80 is actually viewed.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). As shown in FIG. 5, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a, 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning portion, and the detection result thereof. A predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player based on the above. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area forming body 80a, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 89, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b is also referred to as "winning". Express.

Further, in the game area forming body 80a, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine 94 are arranged. Has been done. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the nail member 93, the windmill 94, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). There is. In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is displayed by a two-dot chain line to show a state in which the variable display unit 252 can be visually recognized.

Actuating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. The actuating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper actuating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower actuating port 83b arranged directly under the upper actuating port 83a, and particularly the lower actuating port 83a. The (lottery opportunity ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 91 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit so that the ball enters the lower operating port 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (auxiliary state) where it is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-auxiliary state) where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position on the upstream side (more specifically, the side of the variable display unit 252) of the lower operating port 83b, and the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower operating port 83b over the upper operating port 83a, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the lower operating port 83b than the number of payouts related to the upper operating port 83a.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening leading to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing) for opening / closing the large winning opening. An opening / closing door is provided as a means). The opening / closing door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which the game ball can be entered or easily, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Further, the opening / closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and the opening / closing door is normally kept closed and an internal lottery is performed. When the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) is won in the above (big hit: when the transition result to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), the open state can be switched. It has become.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds or 4 rounds) are set with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) as one round. It is set so that the opening and closing door, which is the upper limit, is repeatedly opened.

Here, the variable display unit 252 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 95 stands up from the front surface of the game area forming body 80a. The gap between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 30 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that detours from the left side and a route that detours from the left side.

A stage portion on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95. The game balls flowing in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. Contributes to. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86 so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion does not move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 252) side. It is regulated.

The operating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since it is possible to shift to the special gaming state by using the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not the operating ports 83a and 83b are won and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 253. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 252.

At the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the game board unit 80 described later), a game area partition member 99 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with the guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member on which the main display unit 87 and the game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collide with each other. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 87 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 30. A main display unit D for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D has a display unit DU for the upper operating port that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating unit that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b. It has a mouth display unit DL. In the display unit DU for the upper operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a. The result of is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit DU for the upper operating port, and as a stop result. After the predetermined pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

In the display unit DL for the lower operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower operating port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b. The result of is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the display unit DL for the lower operating port, and the stop result corresponds to the jackpot result. After the predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display units DL and DU, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the corresponding operation port is displayed. The period until the predetermined stop display time (stop display period or final display period) elapses (until the final display ends) while the pattern is stopped and displayed corresponds to one game. However, one game is not limited to the above contents. For example, a single display area may be provided, and even if any of the operating ports 83a and 83b is awarded, the variable display may be performed in the single display area. In this case, it is possible to set one game time from the start of the variable display in the single display area to the end of the finalized display after the variable display is stopped.

In addition to both of the above display units, the main display unit D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 84. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is obtained. Be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of times held is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 87. A display unit for the number of pending numbers is provided.

The main display unit D described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 30 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 4, a game in which a game ball is launched into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 45 below the accommodating recess 61 (game board unit 80) in the inner frame base body 60. A ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 on which various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is attached to an inner frame base body 60 via a reinforcing plate described later. It is installed.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the launch standby position described above is arranged. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 99 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103 is provided on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. It is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

The guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with a gap between them. A foul ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 55 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 55 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

Further, the inner frame base body 60 has a lock device capable of switching between a locked state in which the game board unit 80 cannot be removed from the accommodating recess 61 and an unlocked state in which the game board unit 80 can be removed. There are multiple. The lock device has an abutting portion that abuts on the front surface of the game board unit 80 in the locked state, and the abutting portion abuts on the front surface of the game board unit 80, whereby the front door frame 14 of the game board unit 80 The displacement to the side will be suppressed.

In the inner frame base body 60, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 60 in the front-rear direction. The passage forming member 121 is arranged so as to cover the above. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 60, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution section described later. Further, a receiving portion 53 (see FIG. 2) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side is below the upper plate passage 122 on the main body side. The upper plate passage is arranged, and the upper plate passage on the front door side is arranged below the lower plate passage 123 on the main body side.

In the inner frame base body 60, below the passage forming member 121, a shutter 124 for restricting the outflow of the game ball from the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is provided. The shutter 124 is supported by the inner frame base body 60 in a state where it can be switched between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball. There is. Further, an urging member for urging the shutter 124 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame base body 60, and the urging force of the urging member when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. The shutter 124 stays in the blocking position. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage 122 or the main body side lower plate passage 123, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. .. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 124 is pushed back to the allowable position against the urging force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other, and the game ball is allowed to move.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 60 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 60 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 61 in the inner frame base body 60 is formed with a central opening 64 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 60. The central opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 61. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game area forming body 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable effect mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like, and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). It is the arrangement area of 253).

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back side of the inner frame base body 60, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 5) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60). Further, a notification / effect control device 143 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 143, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 96 from the rear. The main control unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164, the box can be used. The base and the box cover are combined so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening the package, it is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 163 that the illegal opening has been performed.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably connected to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b, and is downstream. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place on the side is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 81 or the like are gathered below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

Further, in the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b, as the detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entry portions, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball won in the general winning opening 81 and an operating port 83a , 83b is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and these various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212 and. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211. Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and the wiring WH1 connecting the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to these output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state and game status of the pachinko machine 10 based on these various signals. It is configured to grasp.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Formed so that it leads to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 243, the power supply / launch control board is housed in the board box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 45. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the game machine by opening the game machine main part 12 (inner frame 13) to expose the back part of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the game machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. That is, the above-mentioned various switches are difficult to operate when the game machine main unit 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the game machine by a person who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheating person). Is difficult.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a lottery such as a big hit is executed based on the ball entering the operating ports 83a and 83b, and the lottery result is displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) provided in the game board unit 80. ) Will be notified. Therefore, during the game, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the game board unit 80 (particularly, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253). In view of such circumstances, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) shown in the present embodiment is given consideration to the player, such as ensuring visibility when playing a game.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 11, the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253) is a player in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall. It is configured to be located in front of the face. That is, the player's face is configured to be located in a region (specific region SE described later) that is in front of the glass panel 31 and in front of the symbol display device 253. As a result, the game board unit 80 (particularly, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253) can be easily accommodated in the field of view of the player P.

As described above, when playing a game, it is necessary to manually operate the above-mentioned game ball launch handle 45 to launch the game ball. Therefore, the distance between the pachinko machine 10 and the player tends to be short. In the present embodiment, a first movable effect device 300, which is a light emitting type movable effect device, is arranged in a portion of the front door frame 14 above the game board unit 80. Here, regarding the expansion of the human field of view, although there are individual differences, it is approximately 180 to 200 degrees in the left-right direction (the range that can be seen by both eyes at the same time is approximately 120 degrees), and approximately 60 degrees upward and downward in the vertical direction. It is about 70 degrees to the side. Therefore, when the symbol display device 253 is being watched, there is a high possibility that the first movable effect device 300 is located in a blind spot outside the player's field of view. That is, there is a high possibility that the first movable effect device 300 is out of the player's field of view (the range that can be seen without moving the eyes).

In particular, when the window portion 22 of the front door frame 14 is enlarged with the increase in size of the game board unit 80, the arrangement of the first movable effect device 300 becomes more restricted as shown in FIG. , The above-mentioned inconvenience is more likely to occur. Further, even when the first movable effect device 300 is included in the player's field of view, if the first movable effect device 300 is located near the boundary between the inside and outside of the field of view, the color and movement may change. It becomes difficult to grasp, and the visual field level (identification level) is significantly lowered.

For the above reasons, even if the light effect is performed using the first movable effect device 300, it may not be possible to appeal to the player who is gazing at the display screen 253a, and the light effect may be overlooked. Occurs. Therefore, even if the first movable effect device 300 is provided with a light effect function (notification / effect function for the player), there is a concern that it will not function properly. In the first place, when the first movable effect device 300 is not provided with the function of producing and notifying the player, but is provided with the function of notifying other players, the hall manager, etc., the above inconvenience occurs. Although it does not occur, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs when the first movable effect device 300 is used as a means for producing and notifying the player. Certainly, it is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience by increasing the distance between the player and the gaming machine, but such measures have other inconveniences such as deterioration of visibility and operability of the gaming board unit 80. Can be invited.

One of the features of the first movable effect device 300 shown in the present embodiment is that measures are taken against the above-mentioned inconvenience that occurs when the first movable effect device 300 is provided with the light effect function. .. Hereinafter, the first movable effect device 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12A and 13. FIG. 12A is a partial cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the first movable effect device 300 (partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10), and FIG. 13 shows the first movable effect device 300 disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view shown by.

(1st movable production device 300)
As shown in FIG. 12A, the first movable effect device 300 includes a light emitting device 301 as a core on which a light source is mounted and a housing 302 forming an outer shell of the first movable effect device 300. The light emitting device 301 is fixed to the frame body 20 and the cover body 21 in a state of being housed in the housing 302.

The housing 302 has a cover body 310 made of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. The cover body 310 has a hemispherical shape that is open upward (see FIG. 12), and the open portion on the upper side is covered with a lid body 320 that functions as a mounting portion for the frame body 20 and the like. By combining the cover body 310 and the lid body 320, the accommodation space of the light emitting device 301 is partitioned.

The lid body 320 has a dish shape, and an opening 322 connecting the internal space of the lid body 320 and the accommodation space is formed in the bottom portion 321 of the lid body 320. A relay board 330 is arranged on the bottom portion 321 so as to cover the opening 322 from the side (upper side) opposite to the accommodation area. The light emitting device 301 is electrically connected to the notification / effect control device 143 via the relay board 330, and performs (operates) the light effect based on the signal from the notification / effect control device 143.

The light emitting device 301 housed in the housing 302 has a light emitting unit 350 as a target of control by the notification / effect control device 143. The light emitting unit 350 is composed of a columnar light emitting block 355 to which a plurality of light emitting bodies 356 (specifically, LEDs) are attached, and a pedestal 351 to which the light emitting block 355 is fixed. The pedestal 351 has a cylindrical shape extending vertically (see FIG. 12), and the upper flange portion 352 formed at the upper end portion thereof is fixed to the bottom portion 321 and is integrated with the housing 302. Further, the lower flange portion 353 formed at the lower end portion functions as an attachment portion to which the light emitting block 355 is attached. The hollow portion of the pedestal 351 communicates with the opening 322, and the light emitting block 355 and the relay board 330 are connected by wiring through the hollow portion and the opening 322.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral surface of the light emitting block 355 other than the portion facing the front side of the game machine (side surface and back surface: the portion on the central axis CL1 side described later) serves as the arrangement region of the light emitting body 356. There is. As a result, it is avoided that the light from the light emitting block 355 is directly irradiated to the front of the game machine. More specifically, the irradiation range of the light from the light emitting unit 350 (light emitting block 355) is regulated so as to be rearward and diagonally rearward of the game machine.

The light emitting device 301 is equipped with a light reflecting mechanism that reflects the light from the light emitting block 355 to the front of the game machine. The light reflection mechanism is movable, and by operating this light reflection mechanism, the irradiation direction of the reflected light, that is, the irradiation direction of the light from the first movable effect device 300 is changed. Hereinafter, the variable light reflection mechanism that diversifies the light irradiation direction is referred to as a variable mechanism 340.

(Variable mechanism 340)
The variable mechanism 340 includes a movable body 360 provided with a reflector 364 as a light reflecting means, and a holder member 370 as a holding means for holding the movable body 360, and the holder member 370 is attached to the lid 320. Is integrated with the housing 302.

First, a configuration related to attachment of the variable mechanism 340 to the lid 320 will be described. An annular convex portion 323 is formed on the bottom portion 321 of the lid body 320 so as to surround the installation area (upper flange portion 352) of the light emitting unit 350. The annular convex portion 323 has a cylindrical shape, and its central axis is coaxial with the opening 322 and the light emitting unit 350 (pedestal 351).

The holder member 370 has a cylindrical portion 371 that surrounds the light emitting unit 350, and is configured such that the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 371 is equal to the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 323. The holder member 370 is arranged so that the annular convex portion 323 is inserted into the holder member 370, and the inner surface of the cylindrical portion 371 is in surface contact with the outer surface of the annular convex portion 323. The central axis of the annular convex portion 323 and the central axis of the holder member 370 (cylindrical portion 371) are coaxial, and the holder member 370 is subjected to rotation around the central axis CL1 by the lid 320. It is being held. If the holder member 370 can be rotatably held, the detailed configuration of the holding structure is arbitrary.

A motor 381 is arranged on the bottom portion 321 of the lid body 320 as a driving unit for rotating the holder member 370. The motor 381 is connected to the notification / effect control device 143 via the relay board 330, and operates based on the drive signal from the notification / effect control device 143. By transmitting the driving force of the motor 381 to the holder member 370, the holder member 370 rotates about the central axis CL1.

The cylindrical portion 371 of the holder member 370 is formed so that the lower end portion thereof is at the same height position as the lower end portion of the pedestal 351 of the light emitting unit 350, and the light emitting block 355 is formed from the region surrounded by the holder member 370. Is also protruding downward. This prevents the light from the light emitting block 355 from being blocked by the holder member 370.

At the lower end of the holder member 370, a pair of left and right extending portions 372 extending to the same side (downward) as the light emitting block 355 are formed. The extending portions 372 face each other with the light emitting unit 350 (specifically, the central axis CL1) interposed therebetween, and the shaft portion 373 is fixed so as to straddle the extending portions 372.

The movable body 360 has a main body portion 361 in which long plates are arranged side by side (see FIG. 12), and a bearing hole 362 through which the shaft portion 373 is inserted is formed at an intermediate position of the main body portion 361. By engaging the bearing hole 362 and the shaft portion 373, the movable body 360 is held by the holder member 370 in a state where rotation (posture change) around the shaft portion 373 is allowed.

The reflector 364 is disposed at one end of the main body 361, and a weight 363 is disposed at the other end of the main body 361. The weight of the weight 363 is set so that the center of gravity GP1 of the movable body 360 is closer to the other end than the shaft portion 373 (rotation center). By shifting the center of rotation and the center of gravity GP1, the movable body 360 is tilted so that the reflector 364 is on the upper side and the weight 363 is on the lower side.

Here, the main body portion 361 of the movable body 360 is formed with a stopper portion 366 that prevents further rotation by abutting on the holder member 370 (the lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 371). The state in which the stopper portion 366 abuts on the lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 371 and the movable body 360 is tilted obliquely is the standby state of the movable body 360. In this state, the center of gravity GP1 is off the central axis CL1.

When a drive signal is input to the motor 381 from the notification / effect control device 143, the holder member 370 starts rotating about the central axis CL1. Following this, the movable body 360 held by the holder member 370 also rotates.

In the initial stage when the rotation is started from the standby state (resting state), the rotation speed is lowered due to resistance such as friction, and the rotation speed is gradually increased by being accelerated by the continuation of the rotation. After the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed, the rotation speed shifts to steady rotation. At this time, as the rotation speed increases, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 also increases. As the centrifugal force increases in this way, the weight 363 rises and the reflector 364 falls against gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually decreases.

When the rotation speed of the movable body 360 becomes slow due to the motor 381 stopping or the like, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 becomes small. As the centrifugal force decreases in this way, the weight 363 drops and the reflector 364 rises due to gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually increases.

Here, the flow of the light effect by the first movable effect device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 (b) and 14 based on the operation mode of the variable mechanism 340. FIG. 12B is a timing chart showing the flow of the light effect, and FIG. 14 is a schematic view showing the light irradiation direction in each state.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the light effect is started at the timing of t1, the output (power supply) of the light emission signal to the light emitting body 356 of the light emitting unit 350 is started, and the drive signal to the motor 381 is started. Output starts. As a result, light is emitted from the light emitting unit 350 to the front of the game machine by the reflector 364 of the movable body 360.

The reflecting surface 365 of the reflector 364 has a curved surface shape that is convex on the side opposite to the center of rotation, and the diffusion of the reflected light is suppressed. That is, the light from the light emitting unit 350 is irradiated in the direction of the reflecting surface 365 in a state where the spread is suppressed by the reflecting surface 365. In other words, the reflector 364 (reflecting surface 365) is provided with a function of defining the irradiation direction (optical axis) of the light from the first movable effect device 300.

The rotation speed gradually increases from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 when a predetermined period has elapsed. For a predetermined period, at least the number of rotations of the movable body 360 is set to be larger than the predetermined number of times (1 time in the present embodiment). In the present embodiment, the movable body 360 is a rotary type, but by configuring the movable body 360 to rotate at least once during the predetermined period, at least once in the first irradiation state described later. It is guaranteed that the light is emitted toward the front of the game machine.

Here, the light irradiation mode from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14A. During this period, the reflector 364 (the optical axis defined by the reflector) faces diagonally downward. Therefore, the light from the first movable effect device 300 is irradiated obliquely downward. Specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 350 is emitted in the horizontal direction, and the direction is changed by the reflector 364 located on the extension thereof. The direction of the reflector 364 is defined so that the light irradiation direction passes through the specific region SE in front of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a).

As described above, the specific area SE is an area where the head HD (specifically, the eyes) of the player P is assumed to be located. Therefore, the light to the specific region SE is irradiated toward the player P. Hereinafter, the state in which the movable body 360 is tilted and the light is irradiated toward the specific region SE is referred to as the first irradiation state. In the first irradiation state, the light is irradiated toward the player P, so that the player can grasp that the light has been irradiated.

After that, at the timing of ta2 when the rotation speed increases and reaches a predetermined speed, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the inclination of the movable body 360 is reduced by the above-mentioned centrifugal force, and the posture becomes almost horizontal. It changes like. As a result, the light irradiation direction becomes a substantially horizontal direction, and the light irradiation toward the specific region SE is avoided. That is, the light from the first movable effect device 300 passes over the head of the player P, and the irradiation of the light toward the player P is avoided. Hereinafter, a state in which the irradiation of light toward the specific region SE is avoided (a state in which the light irradiation direction is changed to the outside of the game machine from the first irradiation state) is referred to as a second irradiation state.

Even in the second irradiation state, the state in which the first movable effect device 300 is blinking can be visually confirmed by the player P. However, in this case, the amount of light that reaches the eyes of the player P is smaller than that in the first irradiation state. As a result, even when the first movable effect device 300 is directly viewed, it is suppressed that it causes discomfort such as dazzling to the player. In the present embodiment, the light is irradiated through the curved cover body 310, and the light is diffused when passing through the cover body 310. Therefore, when the first movable effect device 300 is directly viewed in the second irradiation state, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first movable effect device 300 is blinking.

After the first movable effect device 300 is in the second irradiation state, the light effect is continued in the second irradiation state for a period longer than the period of the light effect in the first irradiation state. That is, the output (power supply) of the light emitting signal to the light emitting unit 350 is continued until the timing of t3 at which the light effect ends. When the output of the light emitting signal is stopped at the timing of t3, the light emitting unit 350 is turned off. After that, the output of the drive signal to the motor 381 is stopped at the timing of t4.

When the motor 381 is stopped, the rotational speeds of the movable body 360 and the holder member 370 rapidly decrease due to resistance such as friction, and the return to the standby state is completed at the timing of t5. However, since the light emitting unit 350 is already turned off at the timing of t3, the light is not irradiated to the player in this return process.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a part of the game machine main part 12 (front door frame 14) bulges toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in a state of being installed in the island equipment of the game hall. A second movable effect device 400, which is a movable effect device, is arranged in the bulging portion. Here, the configuration related to the second movable effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 15. 15 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first movable effect device 300 (partial cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 15 (a)). is there.

(Second movable production device 400)
As shown in FIG. 2, a bulging portion 435 that bulges forward in the game is formed in a portion of the cover body 21 of the front door frame 14 that is located above the window portion 22. The bulging amount of the bulging portion 435 gradually increases from the left and right ends toward the center, and bulges so as to be convex in front of the game machine. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), a second movable effect is provided on a central portion of the bulge portion 435, specifically, a portion behind the first movable effect device 300 that constitutes a part of the annular illumination portion 24. An accommodating portion 436 for accommodating the device 400 is formed. That is, the bulging portion 435 accommodates two gaming devices so that the first movable effect device 300 is on the front side and the second movable effect device 400 is on the rear side.

The accommodating portion 436 has a concave shape that is open upward, and a part of the second movable effect device 400 is exposed through the open portion. The second movable effect device 400 has a decorative body 410 whose outer peripheral portion is decorated with a pattern or the like. The decorative body 410 is held in a state of being rotatable back and forth about the rotation center axis CL2 by a holding portion 438 formed on the side wall portion 437 of the accommodating portion 436. The decorative body 410 moves to a standby position in which protrusion from the accommodating portion 436 is suppressed by rotating around the rotation center axis CL2 and an effect position in which the decorative body 410 projects from the accommodating portion 436 to the outside (upward) of the game machine. It is possible.

Three face portions are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 410 so as to be arranged in the rotation direction of the decorative body 410. Specifically, the first flat surface portion 411 and the second flat surface portion 412 and the curved surface portion 413 sandwiched between the two flat surface portions 411 and 412 are formed so that the cross section is substantially fan-shaped. The main part of the fan-shaped decorative body 410 is the holding point by the holding portion 438, and the rotation center axis CL2 and the center of gravity GP2 of the decorative body 410 are deviated from each other.

As shown in FIG. 15 (b1), when the decorative body 410 is arranged in the standby position, the second flat surface portion 412 abuts on the rear wall portion 439 of the accommodating portion 436, so that the decorative body 410 rotates due to its own weight. The movement is blocked. That is, the rear wall portion 439 functions as a stopper. In this state, the first flat surface portion 411 is located on substantially the same plane as the upper surface of the frame body 20, and the open portion of the accommodating portion 436 is closed by the first flat surface portion 411. Then, the curved surface portion 413 stays inside the accommodating portion 436, and the curved surface portion 413 cannot be visually recognized from the outside.

The second movable effect device 400 is provided with a solenoid 420 that constitutes a driving means for the decorative body 410. The solenoid 420 is connected to the notification / effect control device 143, and the solenoid 420 operates based on the signal from the notification / effect control device 143. When the effect produced by the second movable effect device 400 is executed, a drive signal is output to the notification / effect control device 143 to excite the solenoid 420. When the solenoid 420 is excited, the decorative body 410 is pushed by the plunger of the solenoid 420, and the decorative body 410 rotates in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the decorative body 410 reaches the effect position, the protrusion 415 formed on the second flat surface portion 412 of the decorative body 410 hits the stopper portion 440 provided on the accommodating portion 436. This prevents further rotation in a predetermined direction. In this state, the curved surface portion 413 protrudes from the accommodating portion 436, and the curved surface portion 413 is allowed to be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. A light emitting body (LED) is built in the decorative body 410, and when an effect using the second movable effect device 400 is executed, the light from the light emitting body passes through the curved surface portion 413 to the front side of the game machine. Is irradiated to. By making the decorative body 410 emit light in this way, the change in the appearance of the second movable effect device 400 is emphasized.

When the effect of the decorative body 410 is completed, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 420 is stopped, and the solenoid 420 is in a non-excited state. As a result, the decorative body 410 returns from the effect position to the standby position due to its own weight or the like (see FIG. 15 (b) → FIG. 15 (a)). Incidentally, the second movable effect device 400 may be provided with an urging means such as a spring, and the urging force of the urging means may be used to promote the movement of the decorative body 410 to the standby position.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602 and a control program stored in the ROM 603. It is an element having a built-in RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604, are provided as another element.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605.

As a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for detecting a prize in the general winning opening 81, a detection sensor 391b for detecting a prize in the variable winning device 82, a detection sensor 391c for detecting a winning in the variable winning device 82, A detection sensor 391d for detecting a prize in the upper operating port 83a, a detection sensor 391e for detecting a winning in the lower operating port 83b, and a detection sensor 391f for detecting a ball entering the through gate 84 are connected to the main control device. At 162 MPU 602, a winning determination (ball entry determination) is made for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 602, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and the support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the result of winning determination to the winning ball portion corresponding to the winning of the operating ports 83a, 83b and the like described above. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when the winning to the upper operating port 83a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and the winning to the lower operating port 83b is output. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing an opening / closing body (for example, a shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b. The main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 602 so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 602 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 602 executes display control of the main display unit of the main display unit 87.

Further, an external output terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and through this external output terminal plate 213, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays the main control board 601 and the power supply / emission control device 243, and the power failure monitoring board 605 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 242 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification / effect control device 143 is provided with a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU is a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be individually chipped. The MPU of the notification / effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp unit 26, the speaker unit 27, the movable effect devices 300, 400, etc. provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. At the same time, it controls the display control device 142.

The display control device 142 executes the display control of the symbol display device 253 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 143, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect, etc.) and the symbol are based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The stop display mode (type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D), setting the outline of the symbol display of the symbol display device 253, and the like. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 17, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the symbol The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the display device 253 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the display unit DL for the operation port of the main display unit 87. It is decided to use the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol in the DU and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as a reserved ball as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the operating ports 83a and 83b. It is stored in area 632.

The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE for the operating port and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8, and operates. Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 according to the winning history of the mouths 83a and 83b is set as pending information in any area Ra1. It is stored in ~ Ra8. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when the operating ports 83a and 83b are awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of → 5th area Ra5 → 6th area Ra6 → 7th area Ra7 → 8th area Ra8. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, up to four prize-winning histories (a total of eight) in each of the operating ports 83a and 83b can be reserved and stored. Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 632, and the stored number of reserved information acquired and stored based on the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is stored in the total reserved number storage area. Information for identification is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the operation port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87. At the start of one game, a winning / failing determination is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 299, the maximum value (that is, 299) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 621 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described.

In the pass / fail table, the address information consisting of binary information and the jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and 10 types of "1" to "10" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is represented by a decimal number "7", "36", "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are one-to-one. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in "0" to "299", which is a numerical range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning / losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low-probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high-probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the winning / losing lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the winning / losing lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that wins the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is high. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set.

As for the normal jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and after the support mode shifts, high frequency support is provided until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). It is a big hit result that becomes a mode. After the end reference number of times has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state winning and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary.

In the present embodiment, the difference is provided so that the distribution based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is more advantageous to the player than the distribution based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a. Specifically, the probabilistic jackpot results are roughly divided into two results with different advantages, the 16R probable jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "16" and the 4R probabilistic jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "4". When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the distribution based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b, the 16R probability variation jackpot result is more likely to be obtained than the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the distribution based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a. ing.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the configuration related to the variable display of the symbols of each game and the content of the variable display. In the following description, FIGS. 18 and 19 will be referred to as appropriate. 18 and 19 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The display control device 142 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 19 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 18A, on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, on the display screen 253a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 253a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, for example, in some of them. The combination of the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and in some cases where the probability variation jackpot result occurs and when the normal jackpot result occurs, For example, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

On the display screen 253a, a hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the hold display area NE, a unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 having the same number as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b is divided so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. Da is provided.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b, the maximum number of holdings is 4 each (8 in total), and the holding number display area Da corresponds to this and the first unit is held. Display area Da1, 2nd unit hold display area Da2, 3rd unit hold display area Da3, 4th unit hold display area Da4, 5th unit hold display area Da5, 6th unit hold display area Da6, 7th unit hold display area Da7 and the eighth unit hold display area Da8 are set. The hold icon MP is displayed as a predetermined hold display image in these unit hold display areas.

For example, if the number of holdings is 0 when the game ball wins the operating ports 83a and 83b and the number of holdings (total number of holdings) becomes 1 due to this winning, only the first unit holding display area Da1 is used. The hold icon MP is displayed. When the number of holdings is 4 by winning the game balls in the operating ports 83a and 83b, the holding icon MP is displayed in the 1st unit holding display area Da1 to the 4th unit holding display area Da4. It has become. Note that FIG. 18B illustrates a case where the number of reserved pieces is three.

Further, in the hold display area NE, a hold icon MP corresponding to the game times to be executed (executed) is arranged side by side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). The execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided. In the present embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged on the left side of the hold number display area Da, but the positional relationship and the like thereof are arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged on the right side of the hold number display area Da.

When the game round ends and the game is moved to the next game round, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) shifts to the execution target display area Db ( Will move). If there are other hold icon MPs being displayed in the hold number display area Da, the hold icon MPs are placed in the unit hold display area (next to) closer to the execution target display area Db in accordance with the shift. Shift to. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the side close to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as "downstream side", and the side opposite to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as "upstream side".

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is compatible with the open / close execution mode. In the game times that are the game results, in the game machine where the stop display result after the variation display can be the special display result, the stop display result after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 253 is started. Refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variation display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a in more detail, in the state where the variable display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row and then the variable display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row, one of the effective lines is hit and the symbol is hit. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row to reach. It becomes a display. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with the numbers constituting the combination of the hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is displayed. Is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the operation port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 253.

When determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 253 or the main display unit 87 (specifically, the display unit DL, DU for the operating port), the buffer value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the fluctuation display time table of ROM 603. Storage area 623 is referenced. Further, in the MPU 602, the stop result in the result display unit for the operation port is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach the maximum value (that is, 249), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in order to advance the game in each game time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 602, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 are read, the states of the detection sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area (lottery counter buffer 631) of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (lottery counter buffer 631) of the RAM 604.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 633 on condition that the number of stored accessories is less than 4. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends. To do.

(Prize processing for operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the upper operating port 83a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 242.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower operating port 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S205, and a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 242. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S205 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S207, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201 and S205, that is, if there is no ball in any of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the start hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 632, specifically, the information acquisition process of the upper operation port 83a and the lower operation port 83b. It is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N related to the triggering operation port is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S302. , The total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are stored in the free storage area of the holding area RE for the operation port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the storage process, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the display update process of the hold number display unit of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D) is executed. In the display update process, when the winning destination is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the holding number display unit for the upper operating port is updated, and when the winning destination is the lower operating port 83b, the holding for the lower operating port is held. Update the display of the number display section.

The holding number display unit for the upper operating port is composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of holdings related to the upper working port 83a match. When the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 83a increases due to this winning, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly. Similarly, the lower working port hold number display unit is also composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of holdings related to the lower working port 83b match. When the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 83b increases due to this winning, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 142, which are the control devices on the sub side (sub side), are made to recognize that the operation ports 83a and 83b have been won, and are held later. The confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process of the hold command, which are the processes for executing the notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command includes information on which of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b is based on winning a prize.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 142 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. By receiving the hold command, the display control device 142 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

Specifically, when the display control device 142 receives the hold command via the notification / effect control device 143, the display control device 142 displays (for example, adds) the hold icon MP in the hold number display area Da. Execute the process. In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold image is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8, which is the eighth from the left. A detailed description of each process in steps S306 and S307 will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S406 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S408 and S409 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143. ..

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S403, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a jackpot determination, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 253, a display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 91 is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 633 of the RAM 604. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the through-gate display unit DS is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 91, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once the electric accessory 91 is in the open state. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 91 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. To excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. Further, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control process)
Next, the game rotation control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and the like of FIGS. 24 to 27.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game rotation is performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game rotation start processing of steps S503 to S505 and the game rotation progress processing of steps S506 to S509. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87 are in the variable display or the final display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S503 to S505. In the game round start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 632. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 632 for the variable display is executed in step S504. Further, in step S505, after executing the variation start processing for starting the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the symbol on the display screen of the symbol display device 253, this The game times control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, among the start hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in order to the lower side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → the second. 1 area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → 4th The data in each area is shifted such as 6 area Ra6, 8th area Ra8 → 7th area Ra7.

In the following step S604, a shift command, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 143 to recognize that the data in the hold area RE has been shifted, is set. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 142 via the notification / effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). By receiving the shift command, the display control device 142 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da for the operation port in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the above-recognized information becomes the information corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the above-mentioned grasped information is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S701 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is specified whether or not the above-identified information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. For details, if the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, refer to the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. If so, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed in step S707. The probability variation jackpot result is roughly classified into a 16R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R probability variation jackpot result. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, which of the 16R probability variation jackpot result and the 4R probability variation jackpot result is determined by the above distribution.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603. It is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S705 and step S706, information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, in step S705, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning or losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 253 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in ROM 603 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the variation display time table for reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to this time. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and in the following step S804, the fluctuation display time information is collected in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. ). After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the jackpot winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display in which the variable display modes are different from each other. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variable type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variable type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the probability variation jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the normal jackpot result. The variable display time is set to.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to in the variation display time table storage area 623 for non-reach, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 in step S805. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the above is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S806. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of common hold number CRNs, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common hold number CRNs may be used, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is smaller. .. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is lost. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable display time table for the normal jackpot, the variable display time table for the missed reach, and the variable display time table for the complete miss may be set individually. As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of reserved information, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like as parameters.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 26), after executing the variation display time setting process in step S708, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the loss result, and the like as information on the game result.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the light emission pattern of the annular illumination unit 24 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 27 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and the determined effect. The annular illumination unit 24 and the speaker unit 27 are controlled so that the contents of the above are executed.

Further, the notification / effect control device 143 transmits the fluctuation start command and the type command to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 142 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and the symbol display device is executed so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. Display control of 253. After that, in step S710, the variation display of the pattern is started on one of the operating port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87, and then the variation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 24), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 604 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode of one of the operating port display units DL and DU of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S508. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 604 is specified in any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, and the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the operation port display units DL and DU. Controls the display units DL and DU for the operation port.

In the following step S509, a variable end command is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 143 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the change end command, the display control device 142 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 87 (specifically, the display unit DL, DU for the operation port) of one game is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, in step S904, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 has a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically, a value determined according to the jackpot type. Set "16" or "4". The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is opened. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, when the large winning opening 32a is closed, the large winning opening is driven by driving the variable winning opening on the condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. To open. In addition, when the large winning opening is open, the variable winning driving unit is provided on the condition that a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. Stop the driving state and close the big prize opening.

In the following step S906, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S907.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, when the probability change jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In addition, these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. When the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game times continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

Then, in step S908, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the stored flag is deleted from the normal jackpot flag and the probability variation jackpot flag.

(About the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 142)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 142 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 912 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 911 provided in the notification / effect control device 143. The MPU 912 is a ROM 913 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 912, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 913 is executed. A certain RAM 914 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 913 and the RAM 914 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 912, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 912 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 912, and the game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the fluctuation start command, the type command, and the fluctuation end command, which have already been explained from the main control device 162, are transmitted. Receive. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the annular illumination unit 24, the speaker unit 27, and the display control device 142 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 912. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 142 is a display control board 951 on which an MPU 952, which is an element in which a program ROM 953 and a work RAM 954 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 955, a character ROM 956, and a video RAM 957, respectively, are mounted. It has. It is not essential that the program ROM 953 and the work RAM 954 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 952, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 143, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 955 (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP955). More specifically, the MPU 952 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 253 based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 143, and also processes related to the hold notice described later. Is executed, and the drawing process for VDP955 is executed according to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The program ROM 953 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 952 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 954 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 952. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 954.

The VDP955 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 253. Since the VDP955 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 955 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 952, the video RAM 957, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 957 from the character ROM 956 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

The character ROM 956 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 253. The character ROM 956 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

Further, in the character ROM 956, as a part of the above data, image data (hold icon MP) to be displayed in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 253 and image data for the partition frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db. The reserved image data storage area 971 in which the image data is stored and the image data storage area 972 for the advance notice effect in which the image data to be displayed when the advance notice effect described later is executed are stored are provided. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 956 and store image data or the like in each character ROM 956. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 953 is stored in the character ROM 956.

The video RAM 957 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the display content of the symbol display device 253 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 957. The video RAM 957 is provided with a hold display area 981 and an execution display area 982 corresponding to the hold display area NE.

In the hold display area 981, the first unit area to the eighth unit area are set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in the hold area RE for the operation port. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. In the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to the unit area in which no data is set, no image is displayed or the background image on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 982 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 982. If the data is not set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a is specified by the notification / effect control device 143 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 142. Specifically, in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 253 is executing the variation display or the definite display of the symbol for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the variation display control process ends after executing the variation start process described later in step S1003.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate processing is executed in step S1005. The variable mid-use process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006, the variation end process is executed in step S1006, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variation end processing, the variation display of the symbol and the effect being executed are terminated (fixed and stopped) so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times. In such a process, the speaker unit 27 and the annular illumination unit 24 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 142, the process for ending the fluctuation is terminated. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, the variation start process of step S1003 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, the reach display and the hold notice effect, which will be described later, are set as the effect for the game round. Here, the process related to the setting of the reach display will be described, and the process related to the setting of the hold notice effect will be described later.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S1101 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1101, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU912.

In the following step S1102, based on the information grasped in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S1103.

In the effect setting process for the jackpot, the stop result of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, the stop result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained for a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. Determined as the result of stopping the game. In addition, in the case of a part of the probability variation jackpot result and the case of the normal jackpot result, the same non-specific symbol (main symbol with an even number) combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The result is determined as the stop result of this game.

The type of main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 913, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop provided in the RAM 914. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. Also in the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 914.

Further, in the effect setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 913 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 913, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed. In the effect setting process for generating reach, the outline of the effect and the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since the former is the same as the process of step S1103, the description is incorporated. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S1104 that no reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a combination of an outline of the effect for complete removal and a symbol to be finally stopped is determined. Since this process corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes of step S1103, step S1105, and step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, a process of outputting a command including information on the stop result and the effect pattern determined in step S1103, step S1105, and step S1106 to the display control device 142 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute the effect in the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1107, in the following step S1108, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 27 and the annular illumination unit 24 is started based on the effect patterns determined in steps S1103, S1105, and S1106 to start the effect for game rounds.

Here, a variation display mode of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) will be supplementarily described based on FIG. 32. FIG. 32 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the variation display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is completely off, and there are five major modes: normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Be separated. Each of these variable display modes is set so that the variable display time is different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. It is possible. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the variable display mode and the variable display time differs depending on whether the support mode by the electric accessory 91 is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. ing.

First, the case where the low frequency support mode is set will be described. In the low frequency support mode, the variable display time of complete deviation is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), and the variable display time of normal reach A is "20 sec". , The variable display time of normal reach B is "24 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, and the variable display time of super reach A is "31 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B. The variable display time is "32 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is "33 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of other Super Reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 143. ..

Next, the case where the high frequency support mode is set will be described. Under the situation of high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time of complete deviation is "1 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), and the fluctuation display time of normal reach A is "20 sec". , The variable display time of normal reach B is "24 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, and the variable display time of super reach A is "36 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B. The variable display time is "37 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is "38 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of other Super Reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 143. ..

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. Off ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞
The configuration is such that it is easy to select in the order of Super Reach C. In other words, the higher the variable display time, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variation display (scroll display) of all the symbol columns that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is ended (stop). (Display), and end (stop display) the variation display of the symbol in the lower symbol column Z3. In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6) are stopped and displayed, so that the reach line is reached. Is formed. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol string Z2 in the middle row is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the symbol column Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game round continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game round is allowed after the stop display period elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. How to set the difference between is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the fluctuation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B, and C will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 21 (b2) to 21 (b4), the super reach A, B, and C form the above-mentioned reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

(About hold notice)
In the present embodiment, the effect related to the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 has a predetermined probability before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be executed in. By executing the production corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been the target of the lottery at a timing before the game times related to the hold information, the player corresponds to the game times currently in progress. In addition to the game of confirming the lottery result of the hold information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the hold information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery target is added according to the content of the above-mentioned effect. Diversification is planned. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

The hold notice is executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 253a in accordance with the above-mentioned variable display of the symbol, and in accordance with the change in the mode of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the display screen 253a. It is roughly divided into what is executed. Of these, the hold display on the display screen 253a is used for the hold notice executed in the hold display area NE. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a) and the schematic diagram of FIG. 33 (b), the configuration premised on the hold notice, the process for hold display control executed by the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 (hold). Display control command correspondence processing) will be described. The hold display control command correspondence process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in the present embodiment).

(Command support processing for hold display control)
As shown in FIG. 33A, in the hold display control command correspondence process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 143. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the value of the hold number counters (holding memory number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 954 is added by 1 in step S1202.

After executing the update process of step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203 to execute the hold display addition process and end the hold display control command corresponding process. The above-mentioned hold storage number SN corresponds to the hold display area 981 of the video RAM 957. When the display setting of the hold icon MP is performed in the hold display addition process, the hold display information (details are stored in the hold image data storage area 971) is stored in the unit area corresponding to the hold storage number SN in the hold display area 981. The address of the reserved image) is set. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold storage number SN = "2". When the hold command is received in the situation of, the hold storage number SN changes from "2" to "3", and the hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area 981. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33 (b2), the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not a shift command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 143. If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process corresponding to the command for this hold display control is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the value of the hold number counter provided in the hold counter area of the work RAM 954 (holding storage number SN) is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S1206, the shift process is executed, and the command corresponding process for this hold display control is terminated. In the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area 981 is moved to the execution display area 982, and is set in the first unit area to the eighth unit area of the hold display area 981. The pending display information is shifted to the lower area side in order.

Specifically, the hold display information of the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 982, and the second unit area → the first unit area, the third unit area → the second unit area, the fourth unit area → the third unit. Within each unit area, such as unit area, 5th unit area → 4th unit area, 6th unit area → 5th unit area, 7th unit area → 6th unit area, 8th unit area → 7th unit area, etc. Shift the hold display information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold storage number SN = "2". When a shift command is received under the situation of, the number of reserved memory SNs changes from "2" to "1". Along with this, the hold display information of the execution display area 982 is deleted, the hold display information of the first unit area is in the execution display area 982, the hold display information of the second unit area is in the first unit area, and the third unit area. The hold display information of the unit area is shifted to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33 (b3), the hold icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit hold display area Da1.

Here, in the hold image data storage area 971, a plurality of types of hold icon MPs having different colors (specifically, four types of white, blue, yellow, and red) are stored as the hold image group, and the above is described for each color. The address is different. When setting the hold display information, the notification / effect control device 143 determines in which color the display is performed according to the presence / absence of the above-mentioned hold notice, etc., and the hold command notifies / effect control device for this information. When passing through 143, it is incorporated into the hold command by the notification / effect control device 143. That is, the display control device 142 reads the information on the color from the received hold command to grasp which color the address corresponding to is set as the hold display information.

Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice, the confirmation process for the hold notice (step S306 in FIG. 22) and the setting process of the hold command (step S307 in FIG. 22) are set, and each of these processes is a timer interrupt process (step S307 in FIG. 22). The winning process for the operating port (see FIG. 21), which is set as a part of the process (see FIG. 20), is specifically executed as a part of the information acquisition process in step S204. That is, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the hold command setting process are executed based on the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b.

Hereinafter, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S1301, the start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 632 are read, and the information on the hold number is transmitted to the MPU 602. Store in the register. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by the current winning includes the information of the jackpot winning.

Specifically, first, in step S1302, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Grasp.

In the following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, it is determined whether or not the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the information for jackpot determination (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Identify if they are included in the group. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S302 is referred to as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306 to determine whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the jackpot winning is supported, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307, and the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referred to. To determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1309, the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 is used as the reach winning by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the ROM 603. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1311, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then the confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the main confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Hold command setting process)
Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In the hold command setting process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. Determine if the information is identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the jackpot correspondence hold command is set. It should be noted that the setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing the command information in the command setting area provided in the RAM 604. The bao, jackpot support hold command contains information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot information is not stored in the register of MPU602, the process proceeds to step S1403 and whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of MPU602. By determining, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation process (FIG. 34) for the immediately preceding hold notice. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the release response hold command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete disconnection response hold command is set in step S1405.

When setting the hold command in steps S1402, S140, and S1405, the fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the information related to the fluctuation display time is stored in the hold command. .. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 142, and the display control device 142 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. As described above, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game round related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the hold command for complete disconnection, the fluctuation display time is temporarily set.

After executing the command setting process of any one of step S1402, step S1404, and step S1405, in step S1406, a process of setting information on the number of pending commands for the pending command is executed. Specifically, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the hold command itself is a hold command or a hold command Information on the number of types to be held is included, and information on the number of pending items can be set.

In step S1406, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 602 is read in step S1301 in the confirmation process (FIG. 34) for the immediately preceding hold notice, and then the number of holds in the hold command that has already been set is read. The information on the number of pending numbers read out for the information bits is stored by arithmetic processing such as OR. As a result, information for identifying the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S1402, step S1404, and step S1405. Will be included. After executing the process of step S1406 described in detail above, the hold command setting process ends.

The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S1406 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 143 identifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Further, the notification / effect control device 143 adds information for a hold notice, which will be described later, to the hold command and transmits the information to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 executes a hold display, hold notice process, or the like based on the received hold command.

Further, the method of setting the hold command depends on the hold command in the display control device 142, such as whether or not a jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time when the jackpot is won, and whether or not reach is generated when the jackpot is not won. It is arbitrary as long as it is possible to specify the variable display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot support hold command, a miss reach support hold command, and a complete loss support hold command is individually set corresponding to each hold quantity, and in the hold command setting process, a confirmation process for hold notice (hold notice processing) It is also possible to select one hold command according to the confirmation result in FIG. 34).

Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described. The processes related to the hold notice are roughly classified into a command correspondence process for determining a command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice effect setting process for determining the mode of the hold notice.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the hold command correspondence process, when the hold command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, the process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command correspondence process is executed as a part of the periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the hold command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received. The command received by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 931 of the RAM 914. The command storage area 931 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well. When determining whether or not the corresponding hold command is received, it is determined whether or not the jackpot corresponding hold command is received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 931. The configuration for reading such a command is the same for reading other commands such as the fluctuation start command.

When the hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 934. The hold information storage area 934 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game round is started. Specifically, while clearing the data of the first area Rc1, the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3 ... The data in each area is shifted in the order of area Rc8 → 7th area Rc7. Also in the hold information storage area 934 of the notification / effect control device 143, the hold information is collected in chronological order regardless of the entry destination, as in the hold ball storage area 632 (specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. It is structured to be memorized. Specifically, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the above-mentioned various information is stored in the area corresponding to the information on the number of holds specified in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914, and when the shift command is received, the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933. .. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice effect described below, and is deleted when the setting process for the hold notice effect is completed.

In the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area 934. Here, the setting process for the hold notice effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold notice effect setting process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

(Setting processing for hold notice production)
In the hold notice effect setting process, first, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the lottery process at the time of receiving the hold command is executed in step S1502.

In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target of the hold notice is limited to the hold information newly added this time. That is, among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 934 of the RAM 914, a lottery for whether or not to give a hold notice is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the hold command received this time. .. In this lottery, whether or not the game times related to the reserved information are big hits, whether or not reach display is performed, and if reach display is performed, the pattern is grasped from the stored information, and the pattern is grasped accordingly. It is performed based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 913, as a lottery table for receiving a hold command, a lottery table for a big hit, a lottery table for a normal reach A, a lottery table for a normal reach B, and a lottery table for a super reach A. , The lottery table for the out-of-order super reach B, the lottery table for the out-of-order super reach C, and the lottery table for the out-of-order super reach C are stored.

For these various tables, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of jackpot ＞ Super Reach C ＞ Super Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Completely out of order.

Returning to the description of step S1501, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, that is, if it is determined that the hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, the hold notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the lottery process at the time of receiving the shift command is executed in step S1504.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery target of the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. That is, a lottery for whether or not to give a hold notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 934 of the RAM 914. This lottery is performed individually for each stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is defined to be the newest order (8th area Rc8 → 7th area Rc7 → ... → 1st area Rc1). For example, when the common hold number CRN is "2", a lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and when the lottery is not won, the information stored in the first area Rc1. The lottery will be held based on.

In the present embodiment, in particular, by increasing the value of the common hold number CRN, the variation display time in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation is shortened. Therefore, by preferentially targeting the new hold information as the lottery target as described above, it is possible to suitably secure the period of the notice effect when the hold notice is executed.

Regarding the lottery method, as in the case of receiving the hold command, whether or not the game times related to the hold information is a big hit from the stored information, whether or not the reach is displayed, and when the reach is displayed. The pattern is grasped, and the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter corresponding to the pattern are used.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 913, as a lottery table for receiving a shift command, a lottery table for a big hit, a lottery table for a normal reach A, a lottery table for a normal reach B, and a lottery table for a super reach A. , The lottery table for the out-of-order super reach B, the lottery table for the out-of-order super reach C, and the lottery table for the out-of-order super reach C are stored.

For these various tables, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of jackpot ＞ Super Reach C ＞ Super Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Completely out of order. However, the lottery table group for receiving the shift command is set so that the probability of winning the hold notice is low when compared with the lottery table group for receiving the hold command. For example, when comparing the lottery tables for big hits, the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the shift command is set lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the hold command.

However, if the value (number of holds) of the common hold number CRN is less than the predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment), the overall expectation of winning is lower than that at the time of receiving the hold command, but the common hold When the value of the number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the overall expectation of winning is set to exceed the time when the hold command is received.

In the present embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common hold number CRN exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined number (“4”), the degree of shortening of the fluctuation display time in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation is the value of the common hold number CRN. It becomes larger than the case of the above-mentioned predetermined number (“4”) or less. In this case, while it is possible to speed up the progress of the game, there is a concern that the monotonousness of the progress of the game will be conspicuous. In this respect, with the above configuration, if the number of holds is large and the variation display time is significantly shortened, the hold notice is likely to occur. This is preferable in order to speed up the progress of the game and suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game.

After executing the lottery process of step S1502 or step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the hold notice effect is satisfied in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, that is, if a non-winning result is obtained in steps S1502 and S1504, the setting process for this hold notice effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the hold notice effect pattern is determined in the following step S1506, the hold notice effect pattern determined in the following step S1507 is stored, and then the hold notice effect is produced. End the setting process.

When it is determined that the hold notice effect is to be performed, the hold information is subject to the lottery for the hold notice effect until the game round related to the corresponding hold information is executed based on the information stored in step S1507. Get out of. Then, the stored information is deleted when the corresponding pending information moves to the execution area.

Here, with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 37 and 38, the types of the hold notice effect (specifically, the notice effect executed in the hold display area NE) will be described.

(Type of hold notice production)
Each of the hold notice effects is common in that the display mode of the hold icon MP displayed in the hold display area NE is changed to suggest the degree of expectation that will result in a big hit. As for the display mode (color) of the hold icon MP, four colors of white, blue, yellow, and red are set. Of these colors, white is the basic color, and when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

The color of the hold icon MP is set so that the expectation of a jackpot result increases in the order of white <blue <yellow <red. Specifically, when a hold notice is executed with the hold icon MP corresponding to the game times that result in a big hit, there is a high possibility that white <blue <yellow <red will be selected in that order. On the other hand, when the hold notice is executed by the hold icon MP corresponding to the game times that result in the loss, there is a high possibility that red <yellow <blue <white are selected in this order.

This hold notice effect is roughly classified into a type 1 notice effect and a type 2 notice effect according to the display mode (color change) of the hold icon MP. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), after the color of the hold icon MP changes in the type 1 notice effect, the color of the hold icon is maintained until the corresponding game times (until the execution target display area Db is reached). Will be done. On the other hand, in the second type advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the color of the hold icon MP changes a plurality of times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that finally changes is red, first change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) with lower expectations, and expect more at the timing when the hold icon MP shifts. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of hold notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation until the corresponding game times are reached. As a result, it is suppressed that the degree of attention to the hold notice production is lowered at an early stage.

The color of the hold icon MP is not changed only in the hold display area Ra, but may be changed when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when the hold icon MP that was yellow in the hold display area Ra moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP is changed to red, or the hold icon MP that was white in the hold display area Ra is held. It is also possible to change the reserved icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red) when the icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

(Direction button device 40)
In the present embodiment, the effect button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 and the configuration related to the effect using the effect button device 40 are characteristic. Hereinafter, the structure of the effect button device 40 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. 39 is a perspective view of the front door frame 14 as viewed from the front, FIGS. 40 (a) and 42 are perspective views of the front door frame 14 as viewed from the front of the game machine, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side surface of the effect button device 40. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button device 40, FIG. 43 is a partially broken view showing the internal structure of the effect button device 40, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation block. In FIG. 42, for convenience of explanation, the side cover 755 of the effect button device 40 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 39, the effect button device 40 is arranged in the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, specifically, the upper bulging portion 28 in front of the upper plate 33 (storage area KE). Has been done. Most of the effect button device 40 is housed inside the upper bulging portion 28, and a part of the operation button projects upward through the opening 28b formed in the upper surface portion 28a of the upper bulging portion 28. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the effect button device 40 includes an operation block 701 having an operation button 721 to be pressed and a pedestal block 702 on which the operation block 701 is mounted. The pedestal block 702 is composed of a metal pedestal plate 711 that functions as a mounting surface for the operation block 701 and a synthetic resin bracket 712 fixed to the pedestal plate 711 from below, and the bracket 712 is in front. The effect button device 40 is integrated with the frame body 20 by being fixed to the frame body 20 of the door frame 14 by a fixing means such as a screw.

The effect button device 40 is not fixed to the upper bulge 28 forming the upper plate 33, and the load generated when the effect button device 40 is operated is applied to the upper bulge through the fixed portion. It suppresses the propagation to 28. This is a device for suppressing deformation of the storage area KE (see FIG. 39) provided on the upper plate 33 and ensuring a smooth flow of the game ball toward the game ball launch mechanism 110.

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation block 701 has a button unit 720 having the operation button 721 and a holder unit 750 holding the button unit 720. The central portion of the pedestal plate 711 is recessed (see FIG. 42), and the holder unit 750 arranged in the recess is fixed to the pedestal plate 711 so that the operation block 701 and the pedestal block 702 are integrated. There is.

Although details will be described later, the holder unit 750 is provided with a lift mechanism 785 (see FIG. 43) for raising and lowering the button unit 720 and a side cover 755 that covers the side surface of the button unit 720. The mechanism 785 is covered by the outer shell of the button unit 720 and the side cover 755.

Here, the button unit 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. 45 and 46 are an exploded perspective view of the button unit 720, and FIG. 47 is a vertical sectional view of the operation block 701.

As shown in FIG. 45, the button unit 720 is formed by vertically combining the operation button 721 and the movable base 741. As shown in FIG. 46, the operation button 721 includes an inner / outer double button member 722, 723 that constitutes the upper portion of the operation button 721, and a housing 726 that constitutes the lower portion of the operation button 721.

The button members 722 and 723 have a cylindrical main body portion and an upper surface portion that closes the opening on the upper end side of the main body portion. Of these, the upper surface portion of the outer button member 722 functions as the "operation surface portion 721a" that is the target of the pressing operation by the player. In the following description, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member are appropriately distinguished as the inner button member 723.

A decorative body 724 is arranged on the upper surface of the inner button member 723. The outer button member 722 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the decorative body 724 can be visually recognized through the operation surface portion 721a of the outer button member 722. The housing 726 is fixed to the inner button member 723 from below. The housing 726 has a bottomed cylindrical shape, and the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 faces the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 with a gap.

The base plate 742 has a flat plate shape, and a cylindrical guide shaft 743 is fixed to the upper surface side thereof. A slider 744 is attached to the guide shaft 743 so as to be slidable along the guide shaft 743. The guide shaft 743 extends in the same direction as the central axis direction of the button members 722 and 723, in other words, in the same direction as the combination direction of the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 (hereinafter referred to as the reference direction), and the guide shaft 743 extends to the upper end thereof. A stopper 743a is formed to prevent the slider 744 from falling off.

A coil spring 745 is inserted through the guide shaft 743. The coil spring 745 is sandwiched between the slider 744 and the base plate 742 (compressed state), and the coil spring 745 urges the slider 744 to the side (upper side) where the slider 744 comes into contact with the stopper 743a. .. The slider 744 is fixed to the housing 726 using a fixture such as a screw. The slider 744 and the guide shaft 743 function as connecting means for connecting the base plate 742 and the housing 726. The urging force of the coil spring 745 is set in consideration of the weight of the operation button 721, and is held at a position where the slider 744 abuts on the stopper 743a when the operation button 721 is not operated. ing.

The light emitting block 725 is housed in the area surrounded by the inner button member 723 and the housing 726. The light emitting block 725 has a light emitting board 732 on which a plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) are mounted and a case body 731 for accommodating the light emitting board 732, and the element mounting surface of the light emitting board 732 is an inner button member 723. It is arranged so as to face the upper surface side. The light emitting board 732 is connected to the notification / effect control device 143, and the light emission control is performed by the notification / effect control device 143.

The case body 731 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin and has light transmission. The light from the light emitting substrate 732 is emitted from the effect button device 40 through the case body 731 → the upper surface portion of the inner button member 723 → the decorative body 724 → the upper surface portion (operation surface portion 721a) of the outer button member 722.

In the effect button device 40 shown in the present embodiment, the attachment structure of the button unit 720 to the holder unit 750 is characteristic. Hereinafter, the mounting structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 47.

As shown in FIG. 44, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are connected by a plurality (three) shaft bodies 728 provided so as to bridge the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750. Specifically, each shaft body 728 extends in the reference direction, and is inserted into an insertion portion such as a central opening 737 formed in the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 and a hollow portion of the guide shaft 743.

As shown in FIG. 47, one end (upper end) of each shaft body 728 is fixed to a fixing portion 734 provided on the light emitting block 725 (specifically, the case body 731) of the button unit 720, and the other end (lower end) is a holder unit. It is fixed to the fixing portion 765 provided on the holder body 751 of the 750. As a result, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are integrated via the shaft body 728.

The outer diameter dimension of the shaft body 728 matches the inner diameter dimension of the guide shaft 743, so that the elevating direction of the operation button 721 by the lift mechanism described above is the same as the reference direction by the shaft body 728 and the guide shaft 743. It is stipulated in. Further, a plurality of shaft bodies 728 are arranged in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis CLX of the operation buttons 721, and the operation buttons 721 (excluding the outer button member 722) centered on the central axis CLX are arranged by the shaft bodies 728. ) Is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the operation surface portion 721a of the operation button 721 is pressed against the urging force of the coil spring 745, the operation button 721 descends along the central axis CLX and the bottom surface of the housing 726. When the portion 736 comes into contact with the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, further displacement becomes impossible. The holder unit 750 is provided with a detection sensor 791 (see FIG. 44) that detects the displacement when the operation button 721 descends to a position where it abuts on the base plate 742. The detection sensor 791 is connected to the notification / effect control device 143, and the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 identifies whether or not the operation button 721 is operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In the following description, the detection position of the operation button 721 by the detection sensor 791 is referred to as an "operation detection position".

(Lift mechanism 785)
In the present embodiment, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 49, by raising and lowering the operation button 721 by the lift mechanism 785, the amount of protrusion of the upper bulging portion 28 from the upper surface portion 28a (opening 28b), that is, The operation stroke of the operation button 721 can be changed. Hereinafter, the lift mechanism 785 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 47, 50 and 51. 50 is a perspective view showing the lift mechanism 785 and its related configuration, FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the rotor 752, and FIG. 51 (b) is a plan view of the power transmission mechanism 754.

As shown in FIG. 44, the holder main body 751 has a disk-shaped bottom portion 761, a peripheral wall portion 762 formed along the outer peripheral portion of the bottom portion 761, and a central portion of the bottom portion 761 in the same direction as the reference direction (upper). ) Has a columnar bearing portion 763 (see FIG. 47) erected so as to extend. As shown in FIG. 47, the central axis of the bearing portion 763 is coaxial with the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and the rotor 752 is mounted on the bearing portion 763.

Specifically, the rotor 752 has a cylindrical holder main body 751, and the holder main body 751 is fixed to the bearing portion 763 by using a fixing tool such as a screw in a state where the holder main body 751 is inserted into the bearing portion 763. .. When the rotor 752 is mounted on the bearing portion 763, the lift from the bottom portion 761 (displacement in the central axis CLX direction) is restricted, while rotation around the central axis CLX is permitted. ..

Central openings 737 and 746 are formed in the central portion of the movable base 741 and the central portion of the housing 726, respectively, and the rotor 752 projects toward the light emitting block 725 through these central openings 737 and 746. The case body 731 of the light emitting block 725 is formed with a bearing portion 733 that engages with the upper end portion of the rotor 752 from the inside, and the bearing portion 733 suppresses the rotor 752 from falling over.

As shown in FIG. 50, a set of protruding pins 747 are arranged on the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 with a central opening 746 (central axis CLX) interposed therebetween. Each protruding pin 747 has a pin member extending in a direction orthogonal to the central axis CLX, and the pin member is attached to the base plate 742 so as to be rotatable about the central axis of the pin member. There is.

The end (tip) of the pin member on the CLX side of the central axis projects toward the central opening 746, and roller members 748 are arranged at the tip of the pin member so as to be coaxial with the pin member. The rotor 752 has a set of engaging grooves 772 formed on the outer peripheral portion of the main body portion 771. The groove width dimension of each engaging groove 772 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748), and the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748) is provided in the engaging groove 772. Engaged.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), each engaging groove 772 is composed of a horizontal portion 775 extending in the horizontal direction and a spiral inclined portion 776 extending upward from one end of the horizontal portion 775. The horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 are continuous, and the protruding pin 747 can move between the horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 while maintaining the engaged state with the engaging groove 772. That is, the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted and the rotor 752 are allowed to change their relative positions in the circumferential direction about the central axis CLX while maintaining the engagement between the roller member 748 and the engaging groove 772. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 50, the holder main body 751 is provided with a stepping motor 753 as a drive unit for the rotor 752 and a power transmission mechanism 754 that transmits the power of the stepping motor 753 to the rotor 752. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the power transmission mechanism 754 includes a drive gear 781 fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 753, a driven gear 779 fixed to the main body 771 (lower end) of the rotor 752, and the like. It has a connecting gear 782 that connects the drive gear 781 and the driven gear 779. The stepping motor 753 is connected to the notification / effect control device 143 and operates based on the drive signal from the notification / effect control device 143. When this driving force is transmitted to the rotor 752 via the power transmission mechanism 754, the rotor 752 rotates about the central axis CLX.

In the present embodiment, the effect button device 40 can be switched to three forms having different appearances by changing the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 by the lift mechanism 785. Here, the movement of the lift mechanism 785 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view showing the lift mechanism 785, and FIG. 53 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the protruding pin 747 and the engaging groove 772. In the following description, in the plan view of the effect button device 40, the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the clockwise direction about the central axis CLX is "forward", and the rotation of the rotor 752 in the counterclockwise direction. The direction of movement is referred to as "reverse direction".

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is minimized when the protrusion pin 747 is located at the horizontal portion 775 of the engagement groove 772. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the forward direction under this situation, the rotor 752 rotates in the forward direction as shown in FIG. 53 (a1) → FIG. 53 (a2).

When the rotation in the positive direction is continued, the protruding pin 747 is pushed upward by the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 as shown in FIG. 53 (a2) → FIG. 53 (a3). Here, the displacement of the rotor 752 to the lower side (downward) along the central axis CLX is regulated by the holder unit 750, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is the upper side along the central axis CLX. (Upward) displacement is allowed. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating around the central axis CLX by the shaft body 728. For these reasons, the movable base 741, that is, the operation button 721 is displaced upward (upward) along the central axis CLX so as to follow the protruding pin 747 pushed upward.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIG. 53 (a3) → FIG. 53 (a4), the protruding pin 747 is the upper end of the engaging groove 772. Immediately before reaching the vicinity of 773, the output of the drive signal for rotation to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52B, the movable base 741 is separated upward from the holder unit 750, and the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is expanded.

In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped immediately before the protrusion pin 747 comes into contact with the upper end portion 773 of the engagement groove 772 by pulse control, and the protrusion pin 747 and the upper end portion 773 are brought into contact with each other. Although the configuration is such that collision is avoided, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) may be stopped when the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the upper end portion 773.

Even after the protruding pin 747 reaches the upper end portion 773, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is continued. As a result, a holding torque for maintaining the rotational position is generated in the stepping motor 753. This holding torque is set in consideration of the weight of the operation button 721, and the operation button 721 is held at the position after the stroke is changed (for example, the maximum protruding position). Although the details will be described later, it is possible to change the drag force (resistance) against the pressing operation by changing the supply current to the stepping motor 753.

Here, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 is allowed at least in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis CLX. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the feeling of rotation of the rotor 752 when the pressing operation is performed from being transmitted to the player's hand. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of discomfort caused by the operation. Further, even if the outer button member 722 is turned by hand, it is possible to prevent the operation button 721 from being lowered due to the rotation, and the operation mode (pressing operation) is different from the operation mode (pressing operation) assumed by the effect button device 40. It is possible to preferably suppress the operation from being performed.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is maximized under the condition that the protrusion pin 747 is located near the upper end portion 773 of the engagement groove 772. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the reverse direction under this situation, the rotor 752 rotates in the reverse direction as shown in FIG. 53 (b1) → FIG. 53 (b2).

As described above, the holder unit 750 regulates the downward displacement of the rotor 752 along the central axis CLX, and the movable base 741 equipped with the protruding pin 747 is located on the central axis CLX. Downward (downward) displacement along is allowed. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating around the central axis CLX by the shaft body 728. For these reasons, the protruding pin 747 follows the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 and descends due to its own weight, and the movable base 741, that is, the operation button 721 is displaced downward (downward) along the central axis CLX.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIG. 53 (b3) → FIG. 53 (b4), the protruding pin 747 is a horizontal portion of the engaging groove 772. Even after reaching 775, the rotation of the stepping motor 753 is continued. Then, just before the protruding pin 747 reaches the vicinity of the lower end portion 774 of the engaging groove 772, the output of the drive signal for rotation to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52A, the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder unit 750 from above, and the expansion of the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is released.

In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped immediately before the protrusion pin 747 comes into contact with the lower end portion 774 of the engagement groove 772 by pulse control, and the protrusion pin 747 and the lower end portion 774 are brought into contact with each other. Although the configuration is such that collision is avoided, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) may be stopped when the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the lower end portion 774.

After the protruding pin 747 reaches the lower end portion 774, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. That is, the stepping motor 753 does not generate a holding torque for maintaining the rotational position. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the increase in power consumption due to the multi-functionalization of the effect button device 40.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the relationship between each form of the effect button device 40 and the operation stroke will be supplementarily described. 54 is a schematic view showing the effect button device 40 in the first form, FIG. 55 is a schematic view showing the effect button device 40 in the second form, and FIG. 57 is a schematic view showing the effect button device 40 in the third form. It is the schematic which shows the apparatus 40.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first mode in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is not expanded, the operation stroke S1 is a gap between the housing 726 (bottom surface portion 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741. It is the same as Sa. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, in the second mode in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded to the maximum, the operation stroke S2 is the housing 726 (bottom portion 736) of the operation button 721. The sum of the gap Sa between the movable base 741 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder body 751 (bottom 761) of the holder unit 750 is the same. As shown in FIG. 56, also in the third form in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded to be about half of the second form, the operation stroke S3 is the housing 726 (bottom portion 736) of the operation button 721. The sum of the gap Sa between the movable base 741 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder body 751 (bottom 761) of the holder unit 750 is the same.

That is, the first to third forms are common in that the operation stroke includes the gap Sa, and the difference in the size of the gap Sb is configured to be the difference in the operation stroke as it is.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the movement of the effect button device 40 when the pressing operation is performed will be described. Since the movements during operation are the same for the second form and the third form, the movements of the effect button device 40 in the case of the second respect will be described, and the movements in the case of the third form will be described. The description of the above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when a pressing operation (pressing operation) is performed in a situation where the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the coil spring 745 (FIG. By compressing (see 42 etc.), the displacement (descent) of the operation button 721 in the same direction as the central axis CLX is allowed. In the first mode, the operation stroke is not expanded, and the movable base 741 is in contact with the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a) → FIG. 57 (b), the operation button 721 (housing 726) abuts on the movable base 741 from above, so that further displacement is impossible.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when a pressing operation (pressing operation) is performed in a situation where the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed in accordance with the operation. By doing so, the displacement (descent) of the operation button 721 in the same direction as the central axis CLX is allowed. In the second mode, the operation stroke is expanded, and the movable base 741 is separated upward from the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750. The holding torque of the movable base 741 (operation block 701) by the stepping motor 753 is larger than the urging force by the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 49 and the like). Therefore, at the initial stage of the pressing operation, the coil spring 745 is compressed so that the operation button 721 is displaced toward the movable base 741 side, and the displacement of the movable base 741 toward the holder unit 750 side is substantially avoided. As shown in FIG. 58 (b) → FIG. 58 (c), after the operation button 721 contacts the movable base 741 from above, the operation button is maintained in the contact state by continuing the pressing operation. The 721 and the movable base 741 are integrated (button unit 720) and displaced toward the holder unit 750. Then, the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above, so that further displacement is impossible.

As described above, the displacement direction (operation direction) when the operation button 721 descends toward the movable base 741 and the displacement direction when the operation button 721 descends toward the holder unit 750 together with the movable base 741. (Operating direction) matches, and changes in the trajectory during the stroke are avoided.

As described above, the game effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 includes an operation-compatible effect using the effect button device 40. The operation-compatible effect has a configuration that can occur in various scenes during the game, and in the present embodiment, the first special effect is provided as one of the operation-compatible effects. Hereinafter, the first special effect will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a schematic view showing the type of the first special effect, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic view showing the pattern of the first special effect.

(1st special production)
As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first special effect is configured to be executed in a part of the game times corresponding to the super reach. Super reach includes Super Reach A that does not support the first special production, Super Reach B that does not support the first special production, Super Reach C that does not support the first special production, Super Reach A that does not support the first special production, and the first. Super Reach B for special effects and Super Reach C for 1st special effects are included, and the 1st special effect is the expected degree of transition to the special game state (big hit expectation) when each super reach occurs. Non-compliant Super Reach A <1st Special Production Non-Compatible Super Reach B <1st Special Production Non-Compatible Super Reach C <1st Special Production Compatible Super Reach A <1st Special Production Compatible Super Reach B <1st Special Production Compatible Super It is set to increase in the order of reach C.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in each of the super reach A to C, the production part (reach display to final display) after the transition to the reach display is roughly divided into the first part to the third part. In the first part that constitutes the early part of the reach display, the branch effect to super reach A to C is executed, and in the second part that constitutes the middle part of the reach display, the chance-up effect that the display mode of the character is changed. Is executed, and in the third part constituting the final part of the reach display, a chance-up effect which is a cut-in display (interrupt display) is executed.

More specifically, in the branching effect executed in the first part, each character corresponding to Super Reach A to C is replaced and displayed on the display screen 253a, and one of the characters is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. By doing so, the super reach that will be the development destination is clarified. As already explained, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is set to increase in the order of Super Reach A <Super Reach B <Super Reach C, so the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state. Can attract attention to the development destination.

In the chance-up effect executed in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the color of this effect suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state. There are three effect colors, white, blue, and red, and it is set so that the expectation of transition to the special game state increases in the order of white <blue <red. In the second part, the effect may or may not be added, but when the first special effect occurs, the addition of the effect is confirmed.

The chance-up effect executed in the third part is an effect in which a cut-in image for chance-up is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the symbol or character displayed on the display screen 253a. The size of the in-image suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state. There are three sizes of the cut-in image, small, medium, and large, and it is set so that the expectation of transition to the special gaming state increases in the order of small <medium <large. In the third part, the cut-in image may or may not be displayed, but when the first special effect occurs, the display of the cut-in image is fixed.

When the first special effect is executed, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 in at least one of the first part to the third part. When the player operates the effect button device 40 according to this suggestion, the effect in each part proceeds based on the operation.

Specifically, when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the first part, the super reach to be developed is specified according to the operation. Specifically, the replacement display ends so that the character corresponding to the development destination is stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen 253a at the timing of the operation. When the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed on the display screen 253a according to the operation. Specifically, a color effect corresponding to the first special effect is added at the timing of operation. When the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the third part, the cut-in image is displayed on the display screen 253a. Specifically, at the timing of the operation, a cut-in image having a size corresponding to the first special effect is displayed.

If the effect button device 40 is not operated during the operation valid period even though the operation is suggested in the first part, the development destination is clearly indicated at the end timing of the first part. That is, only the timing at which the development destination is specified differs depending on whether or not the effect button device 40 is operated. On the other hand, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the operation valid period even though the operation is suggested in the second part, the effect display in the second part is canceled. .. Further, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the operation valid period even though the operation is suggested in the third part, the cut-in display in the third part is canceled.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60, the setting process for the first special effect executed as a part of the periodic process (for example, the effect setting process in the variation start process) in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143. explain.

(Setting process for the first special effect)
In the setting process for the first special effect, first, in step S1601, the current gaming state becomes one of the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, specifically, the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Judge whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time are game times corresponding to super reach. If the game time executed this time is not a game time corresponding to super reach, this setting process is terminated as it is. If the game times executed this time are game times corresponding to super reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, and the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, the lottery process for the first special effect is executed. In this lottery process, it is decided whether or not to perform the first special effect according to the result of the winning or losing lottery. When the result of the winning / failing lottery is a judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the winning probability is higher than when the judgment result (missing result) does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The difference is provided so as to be.

If a non-winning result is obtained in the lottery process in step S1603, a negative determination is made in step S1604 and the present setting process is terminated. If a winning result is obtained in the lottery process in step S1603, an affirmative determination is made in step S1604 and the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the effect pattern determination process for the first special effect is executed, and in the following step S1606, the first special effect setting process is executed based on the effect pattern determined in step S1605, and then for the first special effect. Ends the setting process of.

In the first special effect shown in the present embodiment, the special gaming state is entered depending on the timing at which the operation suggestion is performed after the transition to the reach display and, in detail, after the switch to the second form of the effect button device 40. It is configured so that the migration expectations are different. Hereinafter, the types of the first special effects and their distribution will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. 61 is a schematic view showing the relationship between Super Reach A to C and the type of the first special effect, FIG. 62 is a schematic view showing a distribution table for Super Reach A to B, and FIG. 63 is a shake for Super Reach C. It is a schematic diagram which shows the minute table.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first special effect is an operation in the first special effect A in which the operation suggestion is performed in the first part, the first special effect B in which the operation suggestion is performed in the second part, and the third part. The first special effect C in which suggestions are made, the first special effect D in which operation suggestions are made in the first and third parts, and the first special effect E in which operation suggestions are made in the second and third parts. , The operation suggestion is given in the special game state (specifically, the 7th round) in which the game round ends without the operation suggestion being given in any of the first part to the third part and the transition immediately after the game round. It is roughly divided into 1 special production F.

(In the case of Super Reach A)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61A, in the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A, the timing when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the first part), that is, the transition to the reach display. The operation suggestion is started at the timing when 2 sec elapses from the timing, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 21 sec elapses from the start of the game round (during the first part).

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) 24 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 sec has elapsed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (in the third part) when 31 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 35 sec has elapsed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 21 sec has elapsed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, the operation suggestion is started again at the timing when 31 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 35 sec has passed from the start of the game round (third part). The operation suggestion ends at (middle).

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) 24 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 sec has elapsed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 31 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 35 sec has passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ) Ends the operation suggestion.

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round in the special game state shifted after the end of the game round (specifically, the first round). The operation suggestion is started at the start timing of the 7th round), and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 5 sec has elapsed from the start of the 7th round.

(In the case of Super Reach B)
As shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect A, 17 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the first part), that is, 2 sec has elapsed from the transition timing to the reach display. The operation suggestion is started at the timing of the operation suggestion, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 21 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the first part).

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) 24 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 sec has elapsed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (in the third part) 32 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 36 sec has elapsed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 21 sec has elapsed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 32 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 36 sec has passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ) Ends the operation suggestion.

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) 24 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 sec has elapsed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 32 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 36 sec has passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ) Ends the operation suggestion.

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round in the special game state shifted after the end of the game round (specifically, the first round). The operation suggestion is started at the start timing of the 7th round), and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 5 sec has elapsed from the start of the 7th round.

(In the case of Super Reach C)
As shown in FIG. 61 (c), in the super reach C corresponding to the first special effect B, 24 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the second part), that is, 2 sec has elapsed from the transition timing to the reach display. The operation suggestion is started at the timing of the operation suggestion, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 28 sec has elapsed from the start of the game round (during the second part).

In Super Reach C corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (in the third part) 33 seconds after the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 37 sec has elapsed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach C corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) when 24 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 sec has elapsed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 33 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 37 sec has passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ) Ends the operation suggestion.

In Super Reach C corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round (7th round) in the special game state shifted after the end of the game round. ), The operation suggestion is started, and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or 5 sec has elapsed from the start of the seventh round.

In Super Reach C, unlike Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the first special effect A and the first special effect D are not supported (configuration that does not occur).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, the relationship between the game result and the distribution of the first special effects A to F will be described. In addition, in FIGS. 62 and 63, when the effect button device 40 is operated based on the operation suggestion, the effect button device 40 is switched from the second form to the first form, and the circle mark and the operation are shown. Those in which the second form is maintained even if they are performed are marked with a triangle.

(In the case of Super Reach A and Super Reach B)
When it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which the super reaches A to B corresponding to the deviation result are executed, as shown in FIG. 62, 50% of the game times are the first special effect A, 30% is the first special effect B, and 20% is the first special effect C. When it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which super reach A to B corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, 10% of them are the first special effect A and 15% are the first special effect. Direction B, 60% is the first special effect C, 5% is the first special effect D, and 10% is the first special effect E. When it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which the super reach A to B corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed, 10% of them are the first special effect A and 15% are the first special effects. Direction B, 55% is the first special effect C, 5% is the first special effect D, 10% is the first special effect E, and 5% is the first special effect F.

(In the case of Super Reach C)
On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which the super reach C corresponding to the deviation result is executed, as shown in FIG. 63, 50% of the first special effects are executed. Direction A, 30% is the first special effect B, and 20% is the first special effect C. When it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which the super reach C corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, 15% of the game times are the first special effect B and 70% are the first special effect C. , 15% is the first special effect E. When it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game times in which the super reach C corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed, 15% of the game times are the first special effect B and 60% are the first special effect C. , 15% is the first special effect E, and 10% is the first special effect F.

That is, when the super reach A to C are executed, the expectation of transition to the special gaming state increases in the order of the first special effect A <first special effect B <first special effect C, and the first special effect For D to F, the transition to the special gaming state is confirmed, and for the first special effect F, it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state becomes the third normal gaming state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64, the first special effect processing executed as a part of the periodic processing by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described.

(Processing for the first special production)
In the first special effect processing, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the first special effect. If the game is for the first special effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 and the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been switched to the second form. If it has not been switched to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the reach display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form, and the first special effect process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1703, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing to shift to the reach display, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the game times this time are game times corresponding to the return to the second form. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game times correspond to any of the above-mentioned first special effect D and the first special effect E. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the first special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to return to the second form. If a negative determination is made in step S1706, the first special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, a return process for returning the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed, and then the first special effect process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted during the operation valid period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation activation flag described later is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914.

If a negative determination is made in step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40. If a negative determination is made in step S1709, the first special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, an operation valid period setting process for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button device 40 is performed. As a result, after that, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation valid period elapses. Further, in step S1710, the operation activation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After the operation suggestion start process is executed in the following step S1711, the first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is issued to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the message "press the button" for the operation suggestion, the pattern indicating the button, and the remaining valid are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating a period.

Returning to the description of step S1708, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, that is, during the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the timing has passed the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation is performed, a negative determination is made in step S1713, and the first special effect processing is terminated. If the operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1713, and the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1714, the operation reception notification process and the operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively received from the speaker unit 27. In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S1715, the operation-corresponding effect execution process is performed. As a result, when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the first part, the character corresponding to the development destination is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the effect button device 40 is stopped and displayed in the second part according to the operation suggestion. When is operated, a color effect corresponding to the first special effect is added, and when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the third part, the first special effect is applied. A cut-in image of the corresponding size is displayed. Sound effects and BGM corresponding to these various effects are output from the speaker unit 27.

In the following step S1716, the delay switching process is executed. The delay switching process is a process for driving and controlling the stepping motor 753 in order to hold the effect button device 40 in the first form. Specifically, when the pushing amount during operation is insufficient, the stepping motor 753 is driven to assist the return to the first form, but this operation is the detection information from the detection sensor 791. It will be delayed until it is confirmed that the player's hand has been released from the effect button device 40 based on the above. If the player still presses the effect button device 40 even after the initial validity period has elapsed, the switching to the first mode is executed when the validity period elapses.

After executing the delay switching process in step S1716, the process proceeds to step S1717, the operation activation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 933 is erased, and the first special effect process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1712, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, that is, when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button device 40 being operated, the process proceeds to step S1718 to execute the operation suggestion end process. .. In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S1719, the switching process to the first form is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled in order to hold the effect button device 40 in the first form. That is, unlike the case where the operation is triggered to switch to the first form, the effect button device 40 is quickly switched to the first form when the operation is not performed. After that, in step S1717, the operation activation flag is erased to end the first special effect processing.

Returning to the description of step S1701, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the game is not for the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special gaming state corresponding to the first special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1720, the first special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1720, the process proceeds to step S1721. In step S1721, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the seventh round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, an operation valid period setting process for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button device 40 is performed. As a result, after that, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation valid period elapses. Further, in step S1710, the operation activation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After the operation suggestion start process is executed in the following step S1711, the first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is issued to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the message "press the button" for the operation suggestion, the pattern indicating the button, and the remaining valid are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating a period.

Returning to the description of step S1721, if a negative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1712. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, each process of steps S1713 to S1717 is executed, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, each process of steps S1717 to S1719 is executed, and then the first special effect is performed. End the processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, the flow of the first special effect will be supplementarily described. FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and FIG. 66 shows the flow of the game when the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed. It is a timing chart shown.

(Super Reach A for 1st Special Production A)
At the timing of ta1, the variable display of the symbol is started on the operation port display unit DL of the main display unit D, and the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At the timing of ta2, the display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a shifts to the reach display. This game is a game in which the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and the first part corresponding to the branch effect suggesting the development destination is started at the timing of ta2. At the timing of ta2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded. However, at this point, the operation suggestion is not started.

After the start of the first part, the above-mentioned branching effect, specifically, the replacement display of each character corresponding to the super reach A to C is executed through the fanning display for inciting the transition to the super reach on the display screen 253a. At the timing of ta3 when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the start of this replacement display, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 execute the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled. The speaker. When the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing of ta4 where the operation suggestion is continued, specifically, at the timing of ta4 just before the end of the operation suggestion and the operation valid period, the display screen 253a corresponds to the super reach A by the operation. The image of the fairy will be displayed in a stationary manner. That is, the development destination is specified based on the operation of the player.

Then, the process shifts from the first part to the second part at the timing of ta5, and shifts to the third part at the timing of ta6. After that, the third part ends at the timing of ta7, and at the timing of the following ta8, the game result (for example, the jackpot result) of the game is displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a in order to show the player the game result. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit DL.

In the present embodiment, the later the timing at which the operation suggestion is started after the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode is such that the higher the expectation of transition to the special gaming state is, and in the first part, When the operation suggestion is generated, the expectation of transition to the special gaming state is lowered as compared with the case where the operation suggestion is generated in the second part or the third part. However, even when an operation suggestion occurs in the first part, it is difficult to visually identify the first special effect A and the first special effect D at the time of the operation suggestion, and the player It is possible to raise expectations for the first special production D. This is preferable in order to avoid that the execution of the operation suggestion in the first part is a factor that rapidly reduces the attention to the game.

(Super Reach A for 1st Special Production C)
At the timing of tb1, the variable display of the symbol is started on the operation port display unit DL of the main display unit D, and the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At the timing of tb2, the display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a shifts to the reach display. This game is a game in which the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed, and the first part corresponding to the branch effect suggesting the development destination is started at the timing of tb2. At the timing of tb2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded. However, at this point, the operation suggestion is not started.

After the start of the first part, the above-mentioned branching effect, specifically, the replacement display of each character corresponding to the super reach A to C is executed through the fanning display for inciting the transition to the super reach on the display screen 253a. Unlike the example of FIG. 65, in the first part, the image of the fairy corresponding to the super reach A is stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a without starting the operation suggestion, and the development destination is clearly shown to the player.

At the timing of tb4, the process shifts from the first part to the second part, and at the timing of tb5 thereafter, the process shifts to the third part. The operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is not given even in the second part, and the operation suggestion is carried over to the third and subsequent parts.

At the timing of tb6 after the start of the third part, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 execute the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled. When the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing of tb7 where the operation suggestion is continued, specifically, at the timing of tb7 just before the end of the operation suggestion and the operation valid period, the symbol displayed on the display screen 253a by the operation. The cut-in image for increasing the chance is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the character and the character.

After that, the third part ends at the timing of tb8, and at the timing of tb9 that follows, the game result of the game times (for example, the jackpot result) is displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a in order to show the player the game result. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit DL.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the later the timing at which the operation suggestion is started after the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the higher the expectation of transition to the special gaming state. If no operation suggestion is generated in the first part and the second part, it is determined that the operation suggestion is generated in the third and subsequent parts. According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the game can be publicly increased by extending the period during which the second form is maintained.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact on the effect button device 40 can be strengthened and the effect button device 40 itself can be urged to pay attention to. Here, when the effect button device 40 becomes the second form, the operation of the effect button device 40 (operation button 721) is performed based on the elapse of a predetermined waiting period from the switching to the second form. It is suggested. A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as predetermined waiting periods, and the period during which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form varies variously based on the result of the jackpot lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length of the period maintained in the second form. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. In particular, a player who desires to shift to the special gaming state can be expected to maintain the second form for as long as possible (so that it becomes the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in improving the degree of attention for switching to the second form.

If the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form with the transition to the reach display and the operation suggestion is generated in the first part, the second part, and the third part after the transition to the reach display, the game The person can estimate the period from the progress of the display effect without measuring the period maintained in the second form. By clarifying the difference in the predetermined waiting period in this way, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be suitably exhibited.

Sudden switching of the effect button device 40 to the first form while waiting for an operation suggestion can be a factor that confuses the player. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the second form is maintained until the predetermined waiting period elapses, which causes the above-mentioned inconvenience. Occurrence can be suppressed suitably.

As described above, if the operation stroke of the second form is larger than that of the first form, when the first special effect is executed while suppressing the operation from becoming complicated due to the change to the second form. The effect button device 40 can be made conspicuous.

In the first embodiment, the difference in the period between the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the first part and the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part is , The period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part is configured to be longer than the period until the operation suggestion for the first special effect is generated, and in the second part. The difference in the period between the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed and the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the third part is the timing for switching to the second form (transition to reach display). It was configured to be longer than the period from (timing) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference in the predetermined waiting period from being buried in the flow of the game and becoming difficult to understand.

<Modification example 1>
In the first embodiment, the first special effect is divided into a plurality of parts (first part to third part), and an operation suggestion of the effect button device 40, which is the second form, is generated in each part. The configuration to be obtained has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If at least a plurality of first special effects (first special effects A to first special effects F) having different waiting periods from the completion of switching to the second form to the occurrence of an operation suggestion are provided. Sufficiently, it is arbitrary whether or not to give a correlation between the occurrence timing of the operation suggestion and each of the above parts.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect A is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect B is executed is set to 7 sec. , The difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect B is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect C is executed is standardized as 7 sec, but the difference in timing is used. Is optional. However, in order to suppress confusion of the timing of the operation suggestion, the difference in the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs is longer than the period from the time when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form to the timing when the operation suggestion can be first generated. It is preferable to do so.

<Modification example 3>
In the first embodiment described above, the transition timing to the reach display and the transition timing to the second embodiment are aligned, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the transition timing to the second embodiment is not necessarily limited to this. It is optional. For example, it is possible to have a configuration that shifts to the second form before the transition to the reach display (for example, a configuration that shifts to the second form at the start timing of the corresponding game round), or a configuration that shifts to the second form after the transition to the reach display. It is also possible to have a configuration that shifts to two forms.

<Modification example 4>
In the first embodiment, by giving a correlation between the transition timing to the reach display and the switching timing to the second form, the player watching the symbol display device 253 can switch to the second form. The configuration is such that the timing of occurrence is suppressed from being overlooked, but instead of or in addition to this, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the symbol display device 253 or the speaker unit 27 is used to switch to the second form. It is also possible to have a configuration that suggests or clearly indicates.

For example, a message or image indicating that the effect button device 40 is deformed is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, or a message or sound effect indicating that the effect button device 40 is deformed is displayed from the speaker unit 27. It is also possible to output.

<Modification 5>
In the game times in which the first special effect is executed, it is possible to have a configuration that suggests to the player the period during which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form. For example, when switching to the second form, an effect may be added to the outer peripheral portion of the display screen 253a, and the effect may be changed according to the period during which the effect is maintained in the second form. For example, moving from the first part (early stage) to the second part (middle stage) increases the effect by one level, and moving from the second part (middle stage) to the third part (late stage) further increases the effect by one level. It may be configured to be large. In such a configuration, the effect button device 40 may end the display of the effect based on the switching to the first form.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second embodiment, the counting of the period until the operation suggestion is executed is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first special effect, it is sufficient if a plurality of periods from switching to the second form to executing the operation suggestion are provided, and the period until the operation suggestion is executed is counted from the start timing of the game times. It is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the operation is monitored based on the information from the detection sensor 791, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) in the stroke direction is monitored based on the information from the rotary encoder 792. However, it is also possible to omit the detection sensor 791 as a configuration in which the rotary encoder 792 also functions as the detection sensor 791. That is, it does not deny that the operation is monitored based on the information from the rotary encoder 792. In such a configuration, even when the operation button 721 is displaced from the standby position to the operation position, the rotation angle of the rotor 752 may be changed according to the displacement of the operation button 721.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the height position of the operation detection that triggers the start of the operation corresponding effect changes according to the change of the operation stroke, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the height position of the operation detection to not change even when the operation stroke changes. That is, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the stroke for moving to the detection position that triggers the start of the operation response effect changes.

<Modification example 9>
In the first embodiment, when the effect button device 40 becomes the second form and the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 from the upper surface portion 28a of the upper bulging portion 28 changes, it is operated by the holding torque of the stepping motor 753. The button 721 is maintained in the maximum protruding position, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to maintain the maximum protruding position by the urging force of the urging member such as a spring.

<Modification example 10>
In the game times in which the first special effect is executed, the period elapsed after switching the effect button device 40 to the two modes may be displayed as a timer on the display screen 253a or the like.

<Modification 11>
In the game in which the first special effect is executed, when the effect button device 40 is operated between the time of switching to the second mode and the suggestion of the operation of the effect button device 40 (up to the first detection position CP1). If it is pushed in), it is possible to cancel the planned operation suggestion and the first special effect. In this case, the effect button device 40 may be forcibly returned to the first form. With such a configuration, after switching to the second form, the player is urged to wait until an operation suggestion is generated, and after switching to the second form, the effect button device 40 is suppressed from being operated by the dark clouds. it can.

<Modification example 12>
In the first embodiment, the difference in the period between the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the first part and the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part is , The period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part is longer than the latter. May be configured to be large, or both may be configured to match.

Further, the difference in the period between the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part and the timing when the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the third part is switched to the second form. It was configured to be longer than the period from the timing (the timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, but the former was configured to be larger than the latter. Alternatively, the two may be matched.

<Modification example 13>
In the first embodiment, the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed is measured from the start timing of the game round, but the starting point of the period measurement is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to measure the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed from the timing of transition to the reach display.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the first special effect, which is one of the operation-responsive effects using the effect button device 40, specifically, the configuration related to the second to third parts is the first embodiment. It is different from the form. Hereinafter, the configuration relating to the effect button device 40 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 67, and then, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 67A, when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered by operating the effect button device 40. That is, "all operation strokes" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "all operation strokes" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a "moving range to descend". Specifically, the holding torque by the stepping motor 753 described above is larger than the urging force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, it resists the urging force of the coil spring 745. Then, while the operation button 721 is lowered, the holding position by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 first descends independently. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operation force of the pressing operation of the player exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It will descend.

Here, in the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second form, five of the first detection position CP1 to the fifth detection position CP5 in order from the top between the maximum protrusion position and the lower limit position. The detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP1 is a position where an operation is detected based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. On the other hand, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 are positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

The distance L1 from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, the distance L2 from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, and the distance L3 from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3. The distance L4 from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4 and the distance L5 from the fourth detection position to the fifth detection position CP5 are uniform.

Next, the relationship between the second part and the third part in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (a). In FIG. 69A, the case of Super Reach A is illustrated, but the basic configuration of Super Reach B and Super Reach C is the same.

In the third part, as the display mode of the character image CA, a low expectation mode (before death) in which the expectation of transition to the special gaming state is relatively low and a mode of expectation of transition to the special gaming state are relatively high. A high expectation mode (after transformation) is provided. In the latter half of the second part, the character transformation effect is executed, and when the transformation effect is successful and the display mode of the character image CA is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode, the high expectation mode is used. By executing the production in the third part while maintaining the above, the expectation of transition to the special gaming state becomes relatively high. On the other hand, when the transformation effect fails, the display mode of the character image CA is maintained in the low expectation mode even after the transition to the third part. As a result, the expectation of transition to the special gaming state becomes relatively low.

In the first half of the second part, the predictive effect of this transformation effect is executed. Specifically, the effect EF is added and updated to the displayed character image CA. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the size of the effect EF to be added is provided in five stages of LV1 to LV5, and increases in the order of LV1 <LV2 <LV3 <LV4 <LV5. The success expectation of the transformation effect is differentiated so that it increases as the size of the effect EF increases.

The trigger for adding / updating the effect EF is the operation of the effect button device 40. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70A, the effect EF is added in the state of LV1 when the first detection position is reached, and the effect EF is changed from LV1 to LV2 when the second detection position CP2 is reached. Will be updated to. After that, the size of the effect EF is updated from LV2 to LV3 in a part when the third detection position CP3 is reached, and the size of the effect EF is changed from LV3 to LV3 in a part when the fourth detection position CP4 is reached. LV4 is updated, and the size of the effect EF is updated from LV4 to LV5 in a part when the fifth detection position CP5 is reached.

Here, four update patterns A to D are provided as the update patterns of the effect EF, and one of these update patterns is set when it is decided to execute the first special effect. To. Here, each update pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b).

In the update pattern A, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. Is updated to LV2, and the effect EF of LV2 is maintained unchanged between the second detection position CP2 and the fifth detection position CP5.

In the update pattern B, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. Is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when the displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF of LV3 is updated between the third detection position and the fifth detection position CP5. It is maintained without.

In the update pattern C, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. Is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when the displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is LV4 when the displacement from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. When the displacement is made from the 4th detection position CP4 to the 5th detection position CP5, the effect EF of the LV4 is maintained without being updated.

In the update pattern D, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. Is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when the displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is LV4 when the displacement from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. The effect EF is updated to LV5 when the displacement from the 4th detection position CP4 to the 5th detection position CP5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, when the operation button 721 is operated, the effect level changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721. Subsequent development (directing in the third part) is suggested. Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 71 and 72, the effect change process (first special effect execution process for the second part) executed as part of the periodic process by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143. ) Will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the process for executing the first special effect for the second part, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the game time this time is the game time corresponding to the first special effect. .. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the present execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802 to execute the linked display execution process. This linked display process will be described later.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 is in the second form. Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode at the timing of transition to the reach display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the present execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not it is the operation suggestion start timing. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the present execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the operation validity period setting process is executed in step S1806, and the operation activation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After that, the operation suggestion start process is executed in step S1807, and then the present execution process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, that is, during the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S1809, the present execution process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, the operation suggestion end process is executed. In the following step S1811, the effect addition process is executed in order to add the effect EF to the character image CA displayed on the display screen 253a. In the effect addition process, the speaker unit 27 outputs the sound effect corresponding to the effect addition, and the display control device 142 outputs the effect addition command. The display control device 142 performs a process of adding the effect EF of LV1 to the character image CA displayed on the display screen 253a based on the reception of the effect addition command.

In the following step S1812, the cooperation reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S1813, the validity period resetting process is executed. In the present embodiment, the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded by the second embodiment, and the effect change linked (linked) to the movement of the operation button 721 is generated by using the expanded stroke. To do. As for the period when this effect change occurs, the valid period for accepting operations is in principle, but if the operation is performed just before the end of the valid period due to the expansion of the above stroke, the effect change is generated. There may be a shortage of time for. Specifically, since the effective period of the effect update is measured by using the timer counter that measures the operation effective period, in step S1813, in order to secure (earn) the period for generating such an effect change, Operation reception = Timer counter is not reset, but the process of extending the validity period is performed. Specifically, the operation validity period is extended by 1 sec from the initially set period. After that, in step S1814, the operation activation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the present execution process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1808, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, the operation suggestion end process is executed. After that, in step S1816, a switching process for returning the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed, and in step S1814, the operation activation flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, and this execution is performed. End the processing.

Next, the linked display execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 72. In the linked display execution process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the effect branch timing. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the transformation effect is started in the latter half of the second part. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if the first half of the second part is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not it is in the valid period after the resetting in step S1813. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the processing for executing this linked display is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the timing has passed the valid period after the resetting. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904, and the position identification process of the operation button 721 is executed based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, it is determined which of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 the operation button 721 is located. Specifically, whether or not the first detection position CP1 is displaced to the second detection position CP2, whether or not the second detection position CP2 is displaced to the third detection position CP3, and whether or not the third detection position CP3 is displaced to the fourth detection position CP3. It is determined whether or not the displacement is made to the position CP4 and whether or not the displacement is made from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5.

In the following step S1905, when the displacement from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 in step S1904, when the displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection When displaced to the position CP4, when displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated based on the current update mode.

If the operation button 721 is released during the operation, the operation button 721 is raised by one section due to the urging force of the coil spring 745, but the effect level is increased even if the position of the operation button 721 is changed. It will not be changed. That is, the effect EF of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the descending movement of the operation button 721, but does not change in conjunction with the ascending movement, which is an irreversible relationship.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, that is, when the valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1906, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed, and then the linked display process is performed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if it is the start timing of the transformation effect which is the latter half of the second part, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the cooperation reception flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the operation-corresponding display process is executed in step S1908, and then the linked display execution process is terminated. In the operation-compatible display processing, the display mode of the character image CA is changed so as to be the display mode (low expectation mode / high expectation mode) set at the start of the main game round. If a negative determination is made in step S1907, that is, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid period even though the operation is suggested, a negative determination is made in step S1907 and the process proceeds to step S1909. , After executing the operation non-compliant display process, the process for executing this linked display is terminated. In the operation-incompatible display process, the display mode of the character image CA is set to the low expectation mode regardless of the mode set at the start of the game round. That is, when the effect button device 40 is not operated, the display mode of the character image CA remains the low expectation mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the flow of the first special effect B corresponding to the update pattern D in the present embodiment will be described. Although the case of Super Reach A is illustrated in FIGS. 73 and 74, the basic flow of production is the same even in the case of Super Reach B and Super Reach C.

In FIG. 73 (1), the character image CA corresponding to the super reach is stationary and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. Further, at this timing, the effect button device 40 is already in the second form, and the operation stroke is expanded.

At a predetermined timing after the transition to the second part, the symbol display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 suggest the operation of the effect button device 40. In the operation suggestion, a message for operation suggestion is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 253a, and an image imitating the button in the second form and the remaining operation validity period are shown in the center of the display screen 253a. Indicators are displayed, but these images are omitted.

When the effect button device 40 is pressed by the player and the operation button 721 descends from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), the effect of LV1 is applied to the character image CA during the stationary display. EF is added. After that, the effect level is updated from LV1 to LV2 at the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 (see FIG. 73 (3)), and the operation button 721 is the second detection position. The effect level is updated from LV2 to LV3 at the timing when it descends from CP2 to the third detection position CP3 (see FIG. 73 (4)), and the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. The effect level is updated from LV3 to LV4 (see FIG. 74 (5)), and the effect level is updated from LV4 to LV5 when the operation button 721 descends from the 4th detection position CP4 to the 5th detection position CP5. (See FIG. 74 (6)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (7), the display mode of the character image CA is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode in the transformation effect. After that, the process shifts to the third part while maintaining the display mode of the character image CA (a state in which the high expectation mode and the effect EF are added).

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

Character image when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined position") on the path where the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is displaced by pressing the effect button device 40. The effect EF is added to the CA, and the size of the effect EF is changed when the operating means reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 (corresponding to the "specific position") after the effect EF is added. .. In this way, if the configuration is such that the effect EF is added → the size is changed in conjunction with the operation of 1 of the operating means, it is possible to produce an unprecedented novel effect. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

When the third detection position CP3 to the fifth detection position CP5 are reached, the size of the effect EF does not always change, and the size may not change. Generating such a branch is advantageous in suppressing the change based on the operation from becoming monotonous and enhancing the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

In order to realize a configuration in which the size of the effect EF is changed in conjunction with the operation, it is assumed that the impact of the size change will be stronger if the change has a certain sense of speed. Here, if a time limit is set for the size change as shown in the present embodiment, the player is urged to operate the operation button 721 toward the maximum pressing position at once, which contributes to the enhancement of the impact described above. it can.

As shown in the present embodiment, the size of the effect EF can be changed when the operation button 721 reaches each position of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5, that is, the effect is changed in multiple steps. If the configuration is possible, the expressive power in the size change can be suitably improved.

As described above, in the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the size change of the effect EF are linked, the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form and the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is expanded in advance. Cooperation between the two can be strengthened. Further, it is assumed that the operation of the operation button 721 is often executed vigorously. In this respect, according to the configuration in which the operation stroke is expanded in advance, it becomes easy to obtain a grace period for changing the size of the effect EF. This is preferable in order to prevent the distinctiveness from being lowered due to the size change becoming excessively fast.

<Modification example 1>
In the second embodiment described above, the effect level is updated when the operation button 721 is lowered while the effect EF is added to the character image CA, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the operation button 721 is released before the effect finally changes, the effect may be updated to be smaller.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the first detection position CP1 to the fifth detection position CP5 are set so that the intervals between the detection positions of the operation buttons 721 are uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation button 721 is pressed, the descent speed of the operation button 721 may be faster on the back side due to the momentum. In view of such circumstances, a difference may be provided so that the above interval increases from the upper side to the lower side. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the process of changing the effect level from becoming difficult to see.

Further, it is not always necessary to align the interval from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 with other intervals. Considering that the execution condition of the operation corresponding effect is satisfied by reaching the first detection position CP1, the interval from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 can be made larger than the other intervals. ..

<Modification example 3>
Regarding the effect level update pattern shown in the second embodiment, the configuration is such that if the change in the effect level stops in the middle of the operation, it does not change any more, but when it stops in the middle, the maximum pressing position ( An update pattern may be provided in which the effect level changes at once by jumping over a plurality of levels at the fifth detection position CP5).

<Modification example 4>
In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, the reception condition for the operation correspondence effect is satisfied. It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the maximum pressing position (fifth detection position CP5) based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the reception condition for the operation corresponding effect can be satisfied.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is operated in the second mode in which the stroke expansion of the effect button device 40 is expanded, it is linked to the movement of the operation button 721. Therefore, the effect level of the character image CA is changed, but when the effect button device 40 is operated in the first mode in which the stroke expansion of the effect button device 40 is not expanded. It is also possible to configure the effect level of the character image CA to change in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721. If the stroke of the operation button 721 is small, the effect level changes at a short pitch, and it is assumed that it will be difficult to enjoy the process of change. In view of such circumstances, in order to link the operation of the operation button 721 with the change of the effect level, it is preferable to shift the operation stroke of the operation button 721 to an expanded state.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to change the resistance torque (for example, static torque or drive torque) generated in the stepping motor 753 when the button unit 720 is lowered. For example, the resistance torque may be increased as the maximum protrusion position approaches the maximum pressing position. By increasing the operation resistance on the inner side in the operation direction in this way, it is possible to prevent the change in size of the effect from ending excessively early and making it difficult to identify the change.

<Modification 7>
It is not always necessary to keep the interval between the detection positions CP1 to CP5 constant. For example, a difference may be provided so that the interval increases as the maximum protrusion position approaches the maximum pressing position. With such a configuration, the time required for movement between positions can be increased toward the far side in the operation direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change from becoming difficult to identify due to the change in the size of the effect ending excessively early. Further, a difference may be provided so that the interval becomes larger as the maximum pressing position approaches the maximum protruding position.

<Modification 8>
When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the pressing operation direction, the size of the effect EF can be changed, but the direction is opposite to the pressing operation direction. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the direction, the size of the effect EF may not be changed. With such a configuration, even if the hand is released from the operation button 721 before reaching the fifth detection position CP5, the size change of the effect EF may be rewound by the bounce of the operation button 721 or the like. Absent. This is preferable in order to avoid an unintended size change due to an operation error or the like.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the first embodiment is provided in that a second special effect interlocking with the movable effect device provided in the pachinko machine 10 is provided as one of the operation-responsive effects related to the effect button device 40. It is different from the form of. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the second special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing the type of the second special effect.

As shown in FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first movable effect device 300 and a second movable effect device 400 provided on the front door frame 14. The first movable effect device 300 is arranged on the front surface portion of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14, and the second movable effect device 400 is arranged on the upper surface portion of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14. Further, in addition to the first movable effect device 300 and the second movable effect device 400, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a third movable effect device 803 and a fourth movable effect device 804.

The third movable effect device 803 is arranged in the upper part of the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The third movable effect device 803 has a movable decorative body that can be moved to a standby position in which the overlap with the display screen 253a is avoided and an effect position that overlaps the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect of 803 is executed, the movable decorative body is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

The fourth movable effect device 804 is arranged in the lower part of the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The fourth movable effect device 804 has a movable decorative body that can be moved to a standby position in which overlap with the display screen 253a is avoided and an effect position that overlaps the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect of 804 is executed, the movable decorative body is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

By moving the movable decorative bodies of the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 to the effect position, the overlap with the display screen 253a (specifically, the variable display area ME of the design) is increased. If it is configured, it is sufficient, and it is possible to configure the configuration so that it overlaps with the display screen 253a even in the standby position. However, in order to enhance the impact at the time of production, it is preferable that the overlap with the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) is smaller in the standby position than in the production position.

Incidentally, the movable decorative bodies of the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 also have a light emitting function like the first movable effect device 300 and the second movable effect device 400, and move to the effect position. It is configured to emit light when moved.

Although the first movable effect device 300, the second movable effect device 400, the third movable effect device 803, and the fourth movable effect device 804 all have a function of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state, There is a difference in the degree of expectation when each of the effect devices 300, 400, 803, and 804 is operated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, in the second special effect A in which the first movable effect device 300 operates, the transition to the special gaming state is confirmed, and in other cases, the second movable effect device 400 operates. The second special effect B has the highest expectation of transition, then the second special effect C in which the third movable effect device 803 operates has the highest expectation, and the second special effect D in which the fourth movable effect device 804 operates. The difference is provided so that the degree of expectation of is the lowest.

The second special effects A to D are common in that they are effects that are executed by being operated in a situation where the effect button device 40 is in the second form. In such a configuration, although it is preferable to suppress the monotonousness of the game by diversifying the production, the following adverse effects occur due to the scattered parts that the player should pay attention to. That is, although the impact of the effect using the movable effect device is the strongest at the timing when the movable effect device starts to operate, the movement at the start of the operation of the movable effect is due to the scattered points of interest. It is more likely to be missed. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised to eliminate such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIGS. 75, 77, and 78. FIG. 77 is a schematic view of the front door frame 14 as viewed from the front side of the game machine, and FIG. 78 is a schematic view of the effect button device 40.

As shown in FIG. 75, the front door frame 14 is provided with an annular illumination portion 24 in which a plurality of light emitting portions LT1 to LT14 are arranged so as to surround the window portion 22. The annular illumination unit 24 has a first light emitting unit LT1 adjacent to the effect button device 40 at the head, a second light emitting unit LT2, a third light emitting unit LT3, a fourth light emitting unit LT4, a fifth light emitting unit LT5, and a sixth light emitting unit. Section LT6, 7th light emitting part LT7, 8th light emitting part LT8, 9th light emitting part LT9, 10th light emitting part LT10, 11th light emitting part LT11, 12th light emitting part LT12 are omitted toward the 1st movable effect device 300 in this order. They are arranged at equal intervals, and the rearmost 12th light emitting unit LT12 is adjacent to the 1st movable effect device 300. Further, on the outside of the 11th light emitting unit LT11, the 13th light emitting unit LT13 and the 14th light emitting unit LT14 are arranged so as to bypass the 11th light emitting unit LT11 from the outside. The 14th light emitting unit LT14 is adjacent to the second movable effect device 400. That is, the arrangement of the light emitting units constituting the annular illumination unit is branched into a route toward the first movable effect device 300 and a route toward the second movable effect device 400.

As shown in FIG. 77, the 7th light emitting unit LT7 to the 9th light emitting unit LT9 are arranged along the left and right edges of the display screen 253a, and the change in the distance from the display screen 253a is suppressed. There is. The upper part of the display screen 253a (specifically, the part that is side by side with the 9th light emitting unit LT9) and the lower part of the display screen 253a (specifically, the part that is side by side with the 7th light emitting part LT7) are interlocked with the annular illumination unit 24. A display area CE is provided, and the annular illumination unit 24 and the interlocking display area CE construct a teaching means for teaching the player a movable effect to be operated in the second special effect.

The teaching means is configured to teach an operation target based on the operation of the effect button device 40, and the configuration related to this teaching is characteristic. Hereinafter, the configuration of the effect button device 40 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 78.

In the effect button device 40, when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered by operating the effect button device 40. That is, "all operation strokes" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "all operation strokes" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a "moving range to descend". Specifically, the holding torque by the stepping motor 753 described above is larger than the urging force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, it resists the urging force of the coil spring 745. Then, while the operation button 721 is lowered, the holding position by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 first descends independently. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operation force of the pressing operation of the player exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It will descend.

Here, in the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second form, 13 of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 in order from the top between the maximum protrusion position and the lower limit position. The detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP1 is a position where an operation is detected based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. On the other hand, the second detection positions CP2 to the thirteenth detection positions CP13 are positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

The distances from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the distances from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the distances from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. ... The distance from the 12th detection position CP12 to the 13th detection position CP13 is uniform. Then, the distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 is larger than each of these distances.

Next, the second special effect processing executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 79 to 80.

(Processing for the second special production)
As shown in FIG. 79, in the second special effect processing, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the second special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, the second special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 is in the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the second special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode is executed in step S2006. After that, the setting process of the switching grace period is executed in step S2007 to end the second special effect processing. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the description of step S2004, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, that is, when the grace period for switching to the second form has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the operation validity period is set. After that, the operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2009 to end the second special effect process.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is issued to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the message "press the button" for the operation suggestion, the pattern indicating the button, and the remaining valid are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating a period.

Returning to the description of step S2003, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the timing has passed the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation is performed, a negative determination is made in step S2011, and the second special effect processing is terminated. If the operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, and the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2012, the operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S2013, interlocking flags are set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After that, in step S2014, the waiting period setting process is executed. This standby period is a period referred to when the movable effect device designated as the operation target is operated when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 but does not reach the thirteenth detection position CP13. Is.

After that, the guidance display start process is executed in step S2015 to end the second special effect process. By executing the guidance display start processing, a plurality of arrow images from the left and right edges of the display screen 253a toward the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 are displayed in the interlocking display area CE of the display screen 253a. AR is displayed. Specifically, three arrow images AR1 to AR3 from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 to the third movable effect device 803 are displayed in the upper interlocking display area CE, and the seventh light emission is displayed in the lower interlocking display area CE. Five arrow images AR4 to AR8 from the unit LT7 toward the fourth movable effect device 804 are displayed. However, all of these arrow images AR1 to AR8 are translucent, and the emission level is LOW.

Returning to the description of step S2010, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, that is, when the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation button 721 being operated, the operation suggestion end process is executed in step S2016. After executing the switching process to the first form in the following step S2017, the second special effect processing is terminated. The processes of step S2016 and step S2017 are the same as the processes of step S1718 and step S1719.

(Process for executing the second special effect)
Next, the second special effect execution process in step S2002 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80.

In the second special effect execution process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the movable effect device is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operating flag described later is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the interlocking flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the second special effect execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the waiting period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, a position specifying process for specifying the position of the operation button 721 is executed based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

In the following step S2105, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation button 721 is the 13th detection position CP13. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation button 721 has changed from the time of the previous second special effect processing. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the second special effect execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107 to execute the shift process of the light emitting target. The details of this shift process will be described later.

Returning to the description of step S2105, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the guidance display end process is executed. Specifically, the first light emitting unit LT1 to the 14th light emitting unit LT14 are all turned off, and the first arrow image AR1 to the eighth arrow image AR8 displayed on the display screen 253a are hidden.

In the following step S2109, the second special effect start process is executed. Specifically, the movable effect device corresponding to the second special effect this time is operated. After that, in step S2110, the interlocking flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are deleted, and in the following step S2111, the operating flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. End the production execution process.

Returning to the description of step S2103, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the waiting period has elapsed, after each process of steps S2108 to S2111 is executed, the second special effect is executed. End the process.

Returning to the description of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the operating flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the second special effect execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the second special effect execution process is executed in step S2113, and then the second special effect execution process is terminated. By executing the second special effect end process, the movable effect device to be operated returns to the state before the second special effect (standby state).

Here, the shift process in step S2107 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85.

As shown in FIG. 81, the update pattern (shift pattern) of the lighting target of the light emitting units LT1 to LT14 and the arrow images AR1 to AR8 is set for each of the second special effect A to the second special effect D.

(About the second special production A)
When the second special effect A is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is started. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emitting target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emitting target shifts from the first light emitting unit LT1 to the second light emitting unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emitting target moves to the second light emitting unit LT2. Shifts to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6. When the operation button 721 reaches the 7th detection position CP7, the light emitting target shifts from the 6th light emitting unit LT6 to the 7th light emitting unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the 8th detection position CP8, the light emitting target moves to the 7th light emitting unit LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emitting target shifts from the eighth light emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light emitting unit LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the 9th light emitting unit LT9 to the 10th light emitting unit LT10, and when the operation button 721 reaches the 11th detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts from the 10th light emitting unit LT10 to the 11th light emitting unit LT11. When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target shifts from the eleventh light emitting unit LT11 to the twelfth light emitting unit LT12 adjacent to the first movable effect device 300. Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the twelfth light emitting unit LT12 is turned off, and the first movable effect device 300 is activated. That is, the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT12 is completed, and the first movable effect device 300 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 82).

(About the second special production B)
When the second special effect B is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is started. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emitting target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emitting target shifts from the first light emitting unit LT1 to the second light emitting unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emitting target moves to the second light emitting unit LT2. Shifts to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6. When the operation button 721 reaches the 7th detection position CP7, the light emitting target shifts from the 6th light emitting unit LT6 to the 7th light emitting unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the 8th detection position CP8, the light emitting target moves to the 7th light emitting unit LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emitting target shifts from the eighth light emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light emitting unit LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the 9th light emitting unit LT9 to the 10th light emitting unit LT10, and when the operation button 721 reaches the 11th detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts from the 10th light emitting unit LT10 to the 13th light emitting unit LT13. When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target shifts from the thirteenth light emitting unit LT13 to the fourteenth light emitting unit LT14 adjacent to the second movable effect device 400. Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the 13th detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the 14th light emitting unit LT14 is turned off, and the second movable effect device 400 is activated. That is, the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT10 and LT13 to LT14 is completed, and the second movable effect device 400 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 83).

(About the second special production C)
When the second special effect C is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is started. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emitting target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emitting target shifts from the first light emitting unit LT1 to the second light emitting unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emitting target moves to the second light emitting unit LT2. Shifts to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6. When the operation button 721 reaches the 7th detection position CP7, the light emitting target shifts from the 6th light emitting unit LT6 to the 7th light emitting unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the 8th detection position CP8, the light emitting target moves to the 7th light emitting unit LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emitting target shifts from the eighth light emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light emitting unit LT9. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light emitting target shifts from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 to the first arrow image AR1 (the light emitting level of the first arrow image AR1 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 becomes the first. When the 11th detection position CP11 is reached, the light emitting target shifts from the first arrow image AR1 to the second arrow image AR2 (the light emission level of the second arrow image AR2 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 12th detection position CP12. The light emitting target shifts from the second arrow image AR2 to the third arrow image AR3 adjacent to the third movable effect device 803 (the light emitting level of the third arrow image AR3 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, and the third movable effect device 803 is activated. That is, the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT9 and the arrow images AR1 to AR3 is completed, and the third movable effect device 803 (movable decorative body) descends and emits light (see FIG. 84).

(About the second special production D)
When the second special effect D is executed, the effect button device 40 first switches from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is started. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emitting target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emitting target shifts from the first light emitting unit LT1 to the second light emitting unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emitting target moves to the second light emitting unit LT2. Shifts to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6. When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emitting target shifts from the sixth light emitting unit LT6 to the seventh light emitting unit LT7. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emitting target shifts from the seventh light emitting unit LT7 to the fourth arrow image AR4 (the light emitting level of the fourth arrow image AR4 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 moves. When the 9th detection position CP9 is reached, the light emitting target shifts from the 4th arrow image AR4 to the 5th arrow image AR5 (the light emission level of the 5th arrow image AR5 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 reaches the 10th detection position CP10. Then, the light emitting target shifts from the 5th arrow image AR5 to the 6th arrow image AR6 (the light emitting level of the 6th arrow image AR6 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 11th detection position CP11, the light emitting target becomes the 6th arrow. The image AR6 is shifted to the 7th arrow image AR7 (the light emission level of the 7th arrow image AR7 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 12th detection position CP12, the light emission target is the 4th movable effect from the 7th arrow image AR7. It shifts to the eighth arrow image AR8 adjacent to the device 804 (the emission level of the eighth arrow image AR8 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, and the fourth movable effect device 804 is activated. That is, the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT7 and the arrow images AR4 to AR8 is completed, and the third movable effect device 803 (movable decorative body) descends and emits light (see FIG. 85).

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

A configuration in which the second special effect is executed as an operation-corresponding effect by the movable effect device based on the player operating the effect button device 40 is preferable in order to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the effect button device 40 and the movable effect device becomes long, so that the movable effect device may be out of sight and the beginning of the second special effect may be overlooked. The second special effect is an effect that involves the movement of the decorative body, and the impact at the beginning of the effect tends to be stronger. In view of such circumstances, it is not preferable that the beginning of the production is overlooked in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In particular, as shown in the present embodiment, when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operation targets are used in combination, more specifically, when the effect execution positions of the decorative bodies of the movable effect devices do not overlap each other. Is concerned that such inconvenience will become noticeable.

Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the second special effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button device 40, the decorative body operates after the operation of the effect button device 40 is started. By the time the operation is started, the movable effect device that is the operation target in the second special effect is taught. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight and preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by the second special effect.

The effect button device 40 operates from the time when the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined detection position") reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined detection position") and the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied until the start condition of the second special effect is satisfied. The subject is taught. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be suitably exerted.

When the effect button device 40 (operation button 271) is pressed, the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied → the operation target is taught. For example, even if a player who does not expect teaching stops the pressing operation after reaching the first detection position CP1, the second special effect is executed, so that the needs of various players can be met. That is, it is possible to reduce the chance that the teaching function gives the player the impression that it is bothersome.

In addition, when compared with the configuration in which the execution condition of the teaching → operation-corresponding effect is satisfied with the operation of the operating means, the operation is performed before the predetermined detection position is reached because the type of the second special effect is exposed from the content of the teaching. It is also advantageous in that it does not cause any inconvenience such as interruption.

By shifting the light emitting target along the route connecting the effect button device 40 and the operation target, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the operation target, whereby the above-mentioned concerns can be preferably dispelled. it can. In particular, by linking the movement of the operation button 721 with the shift of the light emitting target, the player can arbitrarily control the shift speed while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

In the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light emitting target are linked as described above, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by expanding the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance. Further, it is assumed that the operation button 721 is often operated vigorously, and there is a concern that the teaching period may be extremely shortened by the above cooperation. In this respect, if the operation stroke is extended, the teaching period can be increased and the oversight of the teaching can be suitably suppressed.

When the effect button device 40 is operated, it is highly possible that the player's attention is directed to the effect button device 40 in order to aim the operation. Therefore, when teaching, the player's attention can be guided to the teaching means by first making the nearest light emitting portion (first light emitting unit LT1) of the effect button device 40 emit light.

By configuring the teaching routes to partially overlap on the effect button device 40 side, the initial light emitting points are common to all the teachings. This is preferable in order to preferably suppress the oversight of the start of teaching.

<Modification example 1>
In the third embodiment, the function of teaching the movable effect unit to be operated is enabled based on the fact that the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 and the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to enable the function of teaching the movable effect device to be operated based on the start of the operation suggestion.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the movable effect device is operated after the teaching of the movable effect device to be operated is completed, but the movable effect device may be operated slightly prior to the end of the teaching. It is possible.

<Modification example 3>
In the third embodiment, the configuration is linked to the operation buttons, but it is also possible to configure the teaching so that the operation buttons are not linked when the start condition is satisfied.

<Modification example 4>
In the third embodiment described above, the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 during the operation valid period. However, this is changed and the operation button is changed. It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied based on the fact that the 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, which is the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the first light emitting unit LT1 to the seventh light emitting unit LT7 (light emitting part) are shared in each of the second special effects A to D, but a shared light emitting part (light emitting part) is provided. It is also possible to have no configuration.

<Modification 6>
In the third embodiment described above, when an operation suggestion is made, any of the movable effect devices is operated based on the operation of the operation button 721, but the operation button 721 is operated. However, a configuration in which the movable effect device does not operate (gase effect) may be used together.

<Modification 7>
In the third embodiment, the operation stroke from the maximum protrusion position to the operation detection position (first detection position CP1) and the operation stroke between the detection positions detected by the rotary encoder 792 are the same (uniform). It is also possible to do.

<Modification 8>
In the third embodiment described above, the operation target is taught by shifting the light emitting target toward the movable effect device that is the operating target, but the light emitting state is also maintained at the light emitting portion that is the shift source. It is also possible to configure the configuration so that the number of light emitting targets increases during the teaching process.

<Modification example 9>
It is also possible to make the shift speed of the light emitting target change so as to be relatively slow on the effect button device 40 side and relatively fast on the movable effect device side. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the oversight of the teaching while suppressing the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long. For example, it is preferable to set each interval of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13, which triggers the shift of the light emitting target, so that the closer to the thirteenth detection position CP13, the shorter the interval.

<Modification example 10>
Either the first half or the second half of the period from when the operation suggestion is given in the game round related to the second special effect until the operation valid period of the effect button device 40 elapses is described above based on the operation of the effect button device 40. It is also possible to set the teaching correspondence period in which the teaching is performed, or the teaching non-correspondence period in which the above-mentioned teaching is not performed even if the effect button device 40 is operated. For example, it is preferable that the teaching start period in which the teaching is started elapses before the operation valid period of the effect button device 40 elapses.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the third special effect, which is one of the operation-compatible effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The third special effect is the same as the first special effect and the second special effect in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated in the situation where the effect button device 40 is in the second form. However, the configuration is different from that of the first special effect and the second special effect in that the flow of the subsequent effect changes according to the pressing position (hold position) of the operation button 721. Hereinafter, the third special effect and the configuration related thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a schematic view showing the effect button device 40, FIG. 86B is a schematic view showing the relationship between the protrusion amount and the torque, and FIG. 87 is the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 during the third special effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

In the effect button device 40, when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered by pressing the effect button device 40. That is, "all operation strokes" = "movement range of the operation button 721", and the movement target is limited to the operation button 721 (the entire button unit 720 does not descend as a unit).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "all operation strokes" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a "moving range to descend". Specifically, the torque (static torque and drive torque) of the stepping motor 753 described above is larger than the urging force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protruding position, the coil is operated. While the operation button 721 descends against the urging force of the spring 745, the holding position itself by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protruding position, the operation button 721 first descends independently. After the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the pressing operation exceeds the torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 becomes the torque of the stepping motor 753. It will descend against it.

Here, in the movement range in which the entire button unit 720 moves, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. That is, when the movement is moved from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, the movement is specified based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, and the above is the range in which the movement exceeds the first detection position CP1 and moves to the maximum pressing position. The position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. In particular, as shown in FIG. 86A, the range from the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position in the total operation stroke is the upper first area E1, the middle second area E2, and the lower third area. The button unit 720 (operation button 721) can be specified in any of these three areas E1 to E3 based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

As illustrated in FIG. 86 (b), regarding the torque generated in the stepping motor 753, when the effect button device 40 is in the first form or in the second form, the operation button 721 is in the maximum protruding position. When the first reference torque TQ1 which is the static torque generated when the position is located and the effect button device 40 are in the second form (except when the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position). It is roughly classified into a second reference torque TQ2 and a third reference torque TQ3, which are generated drive torques. The first reference torque TQ1 is a torque for holding the button unit 720 in the first form, and the first reference torque TQ1 does not act to raise or lower the button unit 720. On the other hand, the second reference torque TQ2 and the third reference torque TQ3 act as a driving force (urging force) for moving the button unit 720 toward the maximum protrusion position. These three increase in the order of first reference torque TQ1 <second reference torque TQ2 <third reference torque TQ3.

When the operation button 721 is not pressed under the condition that the second reference torque TQ2 or the third reference torque TQ3 is generated in the stepping motor 753, the operation button 721 is used for the driving force of the stepping motor 753 and the operation button 721. It moves to the maximum protruding position by the urging force of the coil spring 745, and stands by at the maximum protruding position.

When the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, and when it is located at the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the stepping motor 753 is used. The 3 reference torque TQ3 is generated, and the second reference torque TQ2 is generated in the stepping motor 753 in other parts. That is, the boundary portion (boundary and its vicinity) of each area is a high torque section in which the drive torque (resistance) generated in the stepping motor 753 is larger than that of the other portions. By increasing the resistance at the boundary portion in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the player has reached the boundary portion of each area from the feel of the hand.

Next, the outline of the third special effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The third special effect is an operation-compatible effect that occurs in a part of the game times related to the super reach A to C, and after the development to the super reach, the character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. It will start under the conditions shown in. When the third special effect is started, the symbol being displayed in reach is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 253a, three door image TAs are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a, and the right side of the display screen 253a. An operation indicator indicating the operation amount of the operation button 721 is displayed on the unit. The operation indicator is composed of a gauge GA indicating the entire operation stroke of the operation button 721 and an icon IG that moves up and down in the gauge GA according to the operation position of the operation button 721. The gauge GA displays the boundaries of the first area E1, the second area E2, and the third area E3, and the door image TA displays a pattern or the like showing the outline of the effect to be developed.

When the display on the display screen 253a is switched to one corresponding to the third special effect, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke is expanded. After the stroke expansion is completed, a message suggesting the operation of the effect button device 40 (for example, "press and hold the button to select the door") is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 253a. When the effect button device 40 is operated, the height position of the icon IG is changed according to the position of the operation button 721. Further, in the third special effect, the door image TA to which the character image CA is moved is blinked and displayed by operating the operation button 721, and the object of this blinking display is also linked to the height position of the icon IG. It will be changed. Specifically, when the icon IG is located in the portion corresponding to the first area E1 (upper portion) in the gauge GA, the upper door image TA blinks and the icon IG blinks in the second area in the gauge GA. When it is located in the part corresponding to E2 (middle part), the door image TA in the middle part blinks and the icon IG is located in the part corresponding to the third area E3 (lower part) in the gauge GA. In that case, the lower door image TA blinks.

After that, when the operation button 721 stays in the same area for a predetermined period (when it is held), the door image TA to be selected is determined, and the character image is directed toward the door image TA. The CA will move. As described above, each door image TA is associated with the development destination of the reach display, and after that, the effect selected by the player is executed.

The blinking speed of the door image TA becomes faster as the hold period becomes longer, and the blinking ends when the selection target is confirmed. If the preset operation validity period elapses before the hold period elapses, the development to the production corresponding to the blinking door image TA at that time is confirmed, and within the operation validity period. If the operation button is not operated (when the first detection position CP1 is not reached), the third special effect is canceled in the middle.

Next, the third special effect processing executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 88 to 90.

(Third special production process)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third special effect processing, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the third special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the third special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the third special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 is in the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the third special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S2206. After that, the setting process of the switching grace period is executed in step S2207 to end the third special effect processing. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the description of step S2204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, the operation valid period setting process is performed. After that, the operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2209 to end the third special effect process.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press and hold the button to select a door") from the speaker unit 27, and the display control device 142. Outputs the operation suggestion start command to. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Press and hold the button to select the door" for the operation suggestion is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol indicating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Returning to the description of step S2203, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, during the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the timing has passed the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation is performed, a negative determination is made in step S2211 to end the third special effect processing. If the operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2211 and the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2212, the operation acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. As a result, the development of any of the three types of selective effects in the third special effect is confirmed. In the following step S2213, a predetermined value (corresponding to 3 sec) is set in the hold counter for holding period measurement provided in various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and the third special effect processing is completed.

Returning to the description of step S2210, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2214. In step S2214, the operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, the period indicator indicating the remaining valid period, and the like. ..

In the following step S2215, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed. After that, in step S2216, the operation reception flag stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the third special effect processing is completed.

(Process for executing the second special effect)
Next, the process for executing the third special effect in step S2202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89.

In the third special effect execution process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the operation acceptance flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process for executing the third special effect is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, the position of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. In the following step S2303, the torque change process is executed. Here, the torque change process will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

(Torque change processing)
In the torque change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is located at the boundary portion of the areas E1 to E3. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 in step S2404 is set to the third reference torque TQ3. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position. In this determination, the detection information from the detection sensor 791 is referred to. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set to the first reference torque TQ1. If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set to the second reference torque TQ2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 89, after executing the torque change process of step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is specified in which area of the first area E1 to the third area E3 the position of the operation button 721 specified in step S2302 is included. In the following step S2305, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the area where the operation button 721 is located has changed since the previous execution of the third special effect process. If no area change has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S2306, and the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the values of the hold counters provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 are updated (1 subtracted). In the following step S2308, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold counter is "0", that is, whether or not the above-mentioned hold period has elapsed. If the hold period has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S2308, and the third special effect execution process is terminated as it is. If the hold period has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, and the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the display process corresponding to the third special effect is executed. As a result, the development to the effect selected by the player is confirmed, and the character image CA moves toward the selected door image TA.

Returning to the description of step S2306, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S2306, that is, when the area where the operation button 721 is located changes, the above-mentioned predetermined value (corresponding to 3 sec) is reset to the hold counter. (Reset.

Returning to the description of step S2305, if the operation valid period elapses before the value of the hold counter becomes “0”, the display process corresponding to the third special effect is executed in step S2309. In this process, the development destination is determined so that the effect corresponding to the position of the current operation button 721 is executed, and the movement of the character image CA toward the determined door image TA is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 91, the torque change accompanying the flow of the third special effect will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third special effect.

(Torque change)
At the timing of tk1, the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display unit DU and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 are started. At the timing of tk2, the display shifts to the reach display, and at the timing of tk3, it develops into the third special effect. At the start of the third special effect, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 of the effect button device 40 is changed from the first reference torque TQ1 which is the static torque to the second reference torque TQ2 which is the drive torque. As a result, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) starts moving toward the maximum protruding position. Immediately after, at the timing of tc4, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) reaches the maximum protruding position, and the switching from the first form to the second form of the effect button device 40 is completed. At the timing of tc4, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1, and the button unit 720 is held (stopped) at the maximum protruding position by the first reference torque TQ1.

When the operation button 721 is pressed at the timing of tk5, the operation button 721 is lowered. In the process of lowering the operation button 721, when passing through the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the third reference torque TQ3, and the operation resistance is temporarily reduced. To increase. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operating resistance is reduced. After that, the operation button 721 continues to descend, and when the operation button 721 passes through the boundary portion between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the third reference torque TQ3. The operating resistance temporarily increases. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operating resistance is reduced. At the timing of tc7 when the above hold period has elapsed since the operation button 721 reached the third area E3, the direction of the second reference torque TQ2 generated in the stepping motor 753 is reversed, and the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is pressed. It will be reduced.

By pulling down the button unit 720 (operation button 721), the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form. When the switching of the effect button device 40 to the first form is completed at the timing of tk8, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1.

(Flow of the third special production)
Next, the flow of the third special effect will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. 92 and 93 are schematic views illustrating the flow of the third special effect. Group (a) shows the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, and group (b) shows the effect button device 40.

As shown in FIG. 92 (1) → FIG. 92 (2), the game times related to the third special effect correspond to the super reach display, and the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) after the transition to the reach display. The character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center of. As shown in FIG. 92 (2) → FIG. 92 (3), when the third special effect is developed, a plurality of (three) door image TAs corresponding to the subsequent development destinations are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a. The display is arranged vertically, and an operation indicator (gauge GA and icon IG) indicating the operation amount of the operation button 721 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 253a.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the operation button 721 is pressed and held in the second area E2. As for the operation indicator of the display screen 253a, the icon is stationary and displayed in the central portion of the gauge GA, and the central door image TA of the three door image TAs is blinking and displayed. When the predetermined hold period elapses while the operation button 721 is held in the second area E2, the character image CA moves toward the door image TA selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 93 (4). Along with this, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the central door image TA corresponds to the singing effect. After the character image CA reaches the central door image TA, the singing effect is executed at the center of the display screen 253a (see FIG. 93 (4) → FIG. 93 (5)). The result of the game will be clearly shown to the player depending on whether or not the third special effect (singing effect) is successful. After the end of the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 93 (5) → FIG. 93 (6), the character image CA is hidden, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. ..

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

When the stay period operated (held) by keeping the operation button 721 in any of the first area E1 to the third area E3 reaches the reference period, the operation button 721 corresponds to the stay area of the operation means. It develops into a production. By realizing such a novel operation-responsive effect, it is possible to suitably exert the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by using the effect button device 40.

When the development destination changes according to the stay area of the operation button 721, it becomes difficult to hold the operation button 721 in the desired area because each area becomes smaller, so that the player actively participates in the game (directing button). It is feared that the hold operation of the device 40) will be difficult to perform. That is, it is feared that the difficulty of the hold operation hinders the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the third special effect, which is one of the operation-compatible effects, is executed, the effect button device 40 is performed before the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is performed. By increasing the operation stroke in advance as a configuration for switching to the second form, it is possible to increase each of the above areas E1 to E3. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In a configuration in which the development destination can be branched depending on the hold position of the operation button 721, it may be difficult to grasp the position of the operation button 721 only by tactile information. Such difficulty hinders the diversification of the production pattern by subdividing the entire operation stroke into a plurality of areas. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably eliminated by providing the player with information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operation button 721 and the area.

<Modification example 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is configured to generate a drive torque except when the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position during the operation valid period in the third special effect. It is not limited to. It is also possible to generate a static torque on the operation button 721 during the operation valid period in the third special effect. In this case, while the operation button 721 is located at the boundary portion of each of the areas E1 to E3, it is preferable to increase the operation resistance by increasing the static torque.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the operation resistance is increased by changing the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 at the boundary portion between the areas E1 to E3 so as to be the third reference torque TQ3. It is not limited to. It is also possible to set the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 at the boundary portion between the areas E1 to E3 as the second reference torque TQ2 so as not to increase the operation resistance.

<Modification example 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 are not included in the first area E1, while the operation button 721 is pushed to the first detection position CP1 and then the operation button 721 is used as a hand. When the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protruding position when the operation valid period elapses as a result of the action of releasing the button, it is treated in the same manner as when it is held in the first area E1. It is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to include the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 in the first area E1.

<Modification example 4>
In the fourth embodiment, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 which is the operation detection position, the condition for the development of the production in the third special effect is satisfied. May be changed to. That is, when the operation button is held in a predetermined area for a predetermined period of time, the condition for developing the effect in the third special effect can be satisfied. In this case, the maximum protruding position may be included in the first area or may not be included. However, when the configuration includes the maximum protrusion position, it is preferable that the count of the hold period is started at least once the displacement from the maximum protrusion position is triggered. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous determination as if the first area E1 was selected even though the operation button 721 was not operated.

<Modification 5>
In the third special effect shown in the fourth embodiment, the magnitude of the drive torque generated by the stepping motor 753 during the effect selection period (during the operation effective period) is changed with the passage of time. It is also possible to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the difficulty of holding the operation button 721 in a desired area, and it is possible to prevent the hold operation from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 6>
When the third special effect is executed, at least one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 is set as the winning area, and the operation button 721 is fastened to the winning area according to the operation suggestion to perform the hold operation. Is performed, the effect corresponding to the area winning is executed, while the effect corresponding to the area non-winning is executed when the above hold operation is performed by holding the operation button 721 in an area other than the winning area. It is also possible to configure the structure.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to provide the player with period information indicating the period of stay in the area of the operation button 721 using the symbol display device 253, the speaker unit 27, or the like. However, in the configuration in which the operation button 721 is held, the operation button 721 may move between the areas by slightly adjusting the force. If an event such as resetting the hold period (stay period) during measurement occurs frequently due to such movement between areas, it gives the player an impression that it is troublesome, and there is concern that the operation button 721 will not be operated. Will be done. In view of the fact that it is necessary to adjust the force at the time of holding, the above-mentioned teaching of the period of stay (display of period information) is not performed at the initial stage of stay when staying continuously in the area. It is preferable to do so.

<Modification 8>
In the fourth embodiment, the first area E1 to the third area E3 have the same size, but the size is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the second area E2 between them larger than the first area E1 on the maximum protrusion position side and the third area E3 on the maximum pressing position side.

When performing the hold operation of the operation button 721, it is assumed that it is difficult to make the operation button 721 stay in the second area E2 between the upper limit side and the lower limit side areas E1 and E3 due to the presence or absence of the guideline. This is expected to make it easier for the player who desires easy operation to exclude the second area E2 from the options. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present modification, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the fourth special effect, which is one of the operation-compatible effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The fourth special effect is similar to the first special effect and the second special effect in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated in the situation where the effect button device 40 is in the second form. However, the configuration is different from the first special effect to the third special effect in that the second form is maintained over a plurality of game times. Hereinafter, the fourth special effect and the configuration related thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the gaming state and the display mode, FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic view showing the display screen 253a in the second display mode, and FIG. 95 (b) is a display in the third display mode. FIG. 96 is a schematic view showing the screen 253a, and FIG. 96 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the display mode and the variable display mode.

As shown in FIG. 94, as the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 4R probability variation jackpot result A, the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B It is provided.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode shifts to the third normal game state A corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 16 rounds. Is. This third normal game state A will continue until the next big hit.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode shifts to the third normal game state A corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds. The result. This third normal game state A will continue until the next big hit.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode shifts to the third normal game state B corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds. The result. This third normal game state B will continue until the next big hit.

The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot that shifts to the second normal game state A in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds. The result. The second normal game state A is continued until the executed game times reach the specified number of times (100 times).

The 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot that shifts to the second normal game state B in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds. The result. The second normal game state B is continued until the executed game times reach the specified number of times (100 times).

When the 16R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, "7", "7", and "7" are stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a as a symbol combination clearly indicating that the 16R probability variation jackpot result is the 4R probability variation jackpot result A. When becomes, "1" "1" "1", "3" "3" "3", "5" as a symbol combination clearly indicating that it is a 4R probability variation jackpot result A on the effective line of the display screen 253a. "5" "5", "9" "9" "9" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B are obtained, "2", "2", "2", and "4" are displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a. Any one of "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8" is stopped and displayed. That is, it is difficult to specify which of the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B is the jackpot result from the symbol combination displayed as a stop. Of these, the 4R normal jackpot result A is clearly shown to the player as the 4R normal jackpot result A by the display effect during the special gaming state, while the 4R probability variation jackpot result B and the 4R normal jackpot result B are not. It will shift to the normal game state as it is clearly stated.

If each game state is supplementarily explained, the first normal game state is a game state advantageous to the game hall, and the second normal game state A, the second normal game state B, the third normal game state A, and the third Both the normal game state B and the special game state (open / close execution mode) are game states that are advantageous to the player.

Here, the first display mode to the fourth display mode are provided as display modes for determining the background display on the display screen 253a and the BGM output from the speaker unit 27.

The first display mode corresponds to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode. During the first display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns blue, and the first display mode clearly indicates that the first normal gaming state is in progress.

The second display mode corresponds to the second normal gaming state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the low probability mode. During the second display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns yellow, and the second display mode clearly indicates that the second normal game state A is in progress. During this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 95A, the characters "chance zone" are displayed above the display screen 253a, and the number of remaining games maintained in the game state is counted down.

The third display mode corresponds to the second normal game state B corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode and the third normal game state B corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode. During the third display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns green, suggesting that the third display mode indicates either the second normal game state B or the third normal game state B. During this third display mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the characters "WARNING" are displayed above the display screen 253a. However, unlike the second display mode, the remaining number of games is not displayed even in the second normal game state B with a limited number of times.

The fourth display mode corresponds to the third normal gaming state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode. During the fourth display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns red, and the fourth display mode clearly indicates that the third normal game state A is in effect.

In the present embodiment, the third display mode among the first display mode to the fourth display mode corresponds to the fourth special effect. Here, the third display mode will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 96.

In the third display mode corresponding to the second normal game state B, the variation display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is limited to the complete deviation and the normal reach A, and the normal reach B and the super reach A to C are It is configured so that it does not occur. Regarding the variable display time, 2 to 8 sec is set in the case of complete deviation, and 10 sec is set in the case of normal reach A.

In the third normal game state B, the third display mode is set until the number of games executed in the third normal game state B reaches the specified number of times, and the mode is switched to the fourth display mode when the specified number of times is reached. There is. In the third display mode, as in the second display mode, the variable display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is limited to the complete deviation and the normal reach A, and the normal reach B and the super reach A to C Is not generated. Regarding the variable display time, 2 to 8 sec is set in the case of complete deviation, and 10 sec is set in the case of normal reach A. In the fourth display mode, the variable display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is completely deviated, and either normal reach A to B or super reach A to C is obtained, and the above limitation does not occur. Regarding the variable display time, 1 to 6 sec is set in the case of complete deviation, 20 sec is set in the case of normal reach A, 24 sec is set in the case of normal reach B, 36 sec is set in the case of super reach A, and super In the case of reach B, 37 sec is set, and in the case of super reach C, 38 sec is set. That is, in the fourth display mode, the variable display time is shorter than that of the third display mode for the game times that are completely out of alignment, while the variable display time when the reach display occurs is the third display mode. Is longer than.

Here, the display mode switching process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the third display mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third display mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the first normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the first display mode setting process is executed in step S2503, and then the display mode switching process is terminated.

In the first display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the first display mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933, and the first display mode flag is set and output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the first display mode, and the first display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the first display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background and the like of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to the display corresponding to the first display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2502, if a negative determination is made in step S2502, that is, if it is not the timing to shift to the first normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening / closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the second display mode setting process is executed in step S2505, and then the display mode switching process is terminated.

In the second display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the second display mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933, and the second display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the second display mode, and the second display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the second display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background and the like of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to the display corresponding to the second display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2504, if a negative determination is made in step S2504, that is, if it is not the timing to end the open / close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the open / close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the third display mode setting process is executed in step S2507, and then the display mode switching process is terminated.

In the third display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the third display mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933, and the third display mode flag is set and output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the third display mode, and the third display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the third display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background and the like of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to the display corresponding to the third display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2506, when a negative determination is made in step S2506, that is, when it is not the timing to end the open / close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B, The process proceeds to step S2508. In step S2508, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the opening / closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 4R probability variation jackpot result A. If a negative determination is made in step S2508, the present display mode switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the fourth display mode setting process is executed in step S2509, and then the display mode switching process ends.

In the fourth display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the fourth display mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933, and the display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the fourth display mode, and the fourth display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on the reception of the fourth display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background and the like of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to the display corresponding to the fourth display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, that is, if the current display mode is the third display mode, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the present display mode switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, it is determined whether or not the third display mode halfway end flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2502. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the third display mode halfway end flag stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process proceeds to step S2505. That is, when the third display mode halfway end flag is stored, the mode shifts to the second display mode. In the second display mode in which the third display mode is terminated halfway and the transition is made, the BGM, the background display, and the like are only switched to those corresponding to the second display mode without changing the variable display time.

Next, the fourth special effect processing executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 98 to 102.

(4th special production process)
As shown in FIG. 98, in the fourth special effect processing, first, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the third display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the player is in the open / close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the fourth special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the final round (fourth round). If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the fourth special effect processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, a switching process of switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode by driving and controlling the stepping motor 753 is executed. That is, when the transition to the third display mode is confirmed, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form in the final round in the open / close execution mode (special game state). This switching is completed before the end of the open / close execution mode, that is, before the start of the third display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the third display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the third normal game state process is executed in step S2606, and then the fourth special effect process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, the second normal game state process is executed in step S2607, and then the fourth special effect process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the process for the third normal gaming state in step S2606 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 100.

(Processing for the third normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 99, in the third normal gaming state process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the game times this time are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the third normal game state process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, the operation validity period is set. As a result, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation valid period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S2702, if a negative determination is made in step S2702, that is, if the game times correspond to the deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the out-of-reach. If a negative determination is made in step S2705, the third normal game state process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not there is one corresponding to the jackpot result in the subsequent game times executed during the third normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2706, the third special effect execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After executing the process of step S2707, the operation valid period setting process is executed in step S2704 to end the third special effect execution process.

Returning to the description of step S2701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, that is, if the operation is in the valid period, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, the process proceeds to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the operation suggestion. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2710.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is issued to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the message "press the button" for the operation suggestion, the pattern indicating the button, and the remaining valid are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating a period.

After executing the process of step S2710, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2708, or if a negative decision is made in step S2709, the third normal game state operation correspondence process is executed in step S2711, and then this first step. 3 End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the operation correspondence process for the third normal game state of step S2711 will be described.

(Operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state)
In the operation corresponding process for the third normal game state, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802 to determine whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the operation correspondence process for the third normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, the operation correspondence display process and the operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation-compatible display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out (darkened), and a message suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, one of "chance", "super heat", and "super lucky" is selected based on the game result. In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S2804, the operation validity period is cleared. After that, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, after executing the switching process of switching the effect button device 40 to the first form in step S2806, the operation corresponding process for the third normal game state is terminated. Specifically, when the effect button device 40 is already in the first form, it is maintained in the first form, and when it is in the second form, a driving torque for lowering is generated in the stepping motor 753. The effect button device 40 is forcibly switched to the first form.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the continuation process is executed in step S2807, and then the operation corresponding process for the third normal game state is terminated. The continuation process is a process for maintaining the effect button device 40 in the first form until the end of the game round, and returning it to the second form at the start of the next game round. That is, when the continuation flag is set, even if the effect button device 40 is operated during the operation valid period and the disengagement result is clearly indicated, the second mode is restored. Further, in the continuation process, the continuation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

Next, the process for the second normal gaming state in step S2607 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 102.

(Processing for the second normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 101, in the second normal gaming state process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, the operation validity period is set. As a result, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation valid period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S2902, if a negative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if it is not the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first out-of-reach-corresponding game round after the transition to the second normal game state this time. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the second normal game state process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the operation validity period setting process is executed in step S2903, and then the second normal game state process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the operation is in the valid period, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the operation suggestion. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, the operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2907.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion start command is issued to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the message "press the button" for the operation suggestion, the pattern indicating the button, and the remaining valid are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating a period.

After executing the process of step S2907, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2905, or if a negative decision is made in step S2906, the second normal game state operation correspondence process is executed in step S2908, and then the present first step. 2 End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the operation correspondence process for the second normal game state of step S2908 will be described.

(Operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state operation correspondence process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002 to determine whether or not the effect button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the operation correspondence process for the second normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the operation correspondence display process and the operation suggestion end process are executed. In the operation-compatible display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out (darkened), and a message suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, either "super heat" or "super lucky" is selected based on the game result. In addition, "Super Lucky" corresponds to the jackpot result, and "Intense heat" corresponds to both the jackpot result and the missed result.

In the operation suggestion end process, the operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the operation suggestion message, the pattern indicating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S3004, the operation valid period is cleared, and in step S3005, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed. After that, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of games executed during the second normal game state has reached the predetermined number of times. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the halfway end flag of the third display mode is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3007, and the operation correspondence process for the second normal game state is ended. .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, the second normal game state operation correspondence process is terminated as it is. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button device 40 is operated during the operation valid period even before the predetermined number of times is reached, or the effect button device 40 is not operated during the operation valid period. When the operation valid period has elapsed, the third display mode may end in the middle and shift to the second display mode.

Returning to the description of step S3001, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, that is, when the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, the operation suggestion end process is executed, and in the following step S3009, the operation non-correspondence display process is executed. In the operation-incompatible display process, the variable display of the symbol is continued without performing the blackout (darkening) display described above.

After that, the processes of steps S3005 to S3007 are executed to end the operation-corresponding process for the second normal game state.

Next, the flow of the fourth special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the fourth special effect is generated, and FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the fourth special effect. Note that FIG. 103 illustrates a case where a big hit result is obtained in the fifth game round in the third normal game state B.

(Flow of the 4th special production)
The game times started at td1 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B. In this game round, the symbol combinations (for example, "2", "2", and "2") corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B are stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a at the timing of td2. At the timing of td3 after the fixed display period has passed, the first normal gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state. In accordance with this, the display mode also switches from the first display mode to the display mode (special display mode) corresponding to the special gaming state.

At the timing of td4 when the final round (fourth round) ends in the special game state, the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. Further, in accordance with this, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 notify that the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form.

At the timing of td5, the special gaming state shifts to the third normal gaming state B, and the first gaming round in the third normal gaming state B is started. In the third normal game state B, the display mode is switched to the third display mode, and the characters "WARNING" corresponding to the third display mode are displayed on the upper part of the display screen 253a (FIG. 104 (a1)). reference). At the timing of td6, the fifth game round after the transition to the third normal game state B is started. This game round corresponds to the jackpot result.

At the timing of td6 when the game round is started, an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button device 40 is valid is set. After that, the operation of the effect button device 40 becomes effective until the operation valid period elapses. At the timing of td7 after the display mode on the display screen 253a is the reach display, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 (see FIG. 104 (a2)). At the timing of td8 when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion, the display screen 253a is blacked out and a message (for example, "super lucky" or "super heat") indicating the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state is displayed. (See FIG. 104 (a3)). In line with this, the above-mentioned operation suggestion and operation validity period will end. By the operation, the effect button device 40 switches from the second form to the first form.

Immediately after the timing of td9, the above blackout and message display are canceled, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a, and it is clearly shown to the player that the jackpot result has been obtained. (See FIG. 104 (a4)). After that, the game shifts to the special gaming state at the timing of td10.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

In the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the form of the effect button device 40 (corresponding to the "state suggestion means") provided on the front door frame 14 which is the "front part of the game machine" is the second. It is suggested that the form is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Since the front door frame 14 is a portion that is easier to see by other players as compared with, for example, the symbol display device 253 arranged on the back side of the game machine, the effect provided on the front door frame 14 is provided. By configuring the button device 40 to suggest that the gaming state is advantageous to the player, it is possible to preferably arouse the superiority complex of the player playing the game with the game machine.

Here, the effect button device 40 can be operated even when it is in the second form. In this way, if the effect button device 40 can be operated in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the effect button device 40 will give a good impression of the player to the effect button device 40 that is a state suggesting means. It is advantageous in increasing the degree of attention to the second form.

When the effect button device 40 (second mode) is operated in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the effect corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery related to the game times in which the operation is performed is executed. Will be done. Since the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are game states that are advantageous to the player, the chances that an effect that is advantageous to the player will be generated by the operation will increase. This is advantageous in improving the impression of the player on the effect button device 40 and improving the degree of attention that the effect button device 40 becomes the second form.

When the effect button device 40, which is the second form in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, is operated according to the operation suggestion, the subsequent forms are divided into the first form / the second form. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the operation of the effect button device 40.

When it is decided to return to the second form during the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the said is at least until the game round in which the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion is completed. It is configured to delay the return. As described above, by adopting the configuration in which the return is delayed until the end of the game round, it is possible to preferably suppress the degree of attention to the game from being lowered due to the movement of the effect button device 40 being transmitted to the player's hand.

When the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the amount of protrusion of the effect button device 40 from the front door frame 14 becomes large. This is preferable for making the effect button device 40 stand out, but it becomes difficult to access the back of the effect button device 40. It is not preferable that the restrictions on the arrangement of the effect button device 40 become stronger due to such circumstances in order to improve the convenience and the degree of attention of the effect button device 40. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form in the high frequency support mode in which the decrease of the game ball is suppressed, the effect button device 40 can be used as the storage means. Even if it is arranged around the upper plate 33 (particularly on the front side), it is possible to prevent the effect button device 40 from substantially interfering with the supply of game balls. By relaxing the restrictions on the arrangement of the effect button device 40 in this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

When executing the fourth special effect in the third display mode, it is not necessary to switch the button to the second form when the effect is started. As described above, since the preliminary operation for switching the form of the effect button device 40 becomes unnecessary, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of the fourth special effect from being exposed by the preliminary operation.

<Modification example 1>
In the fifth embodiment, it is substantially difficult to distinguish between the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, and the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are supported. By maintaining the effect button device 40 in the second form during the third display mode, it is suggested that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Considering that the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B have different advantages but are both advantageous game states for the player, the display modes are divided so that each game state can be easily identified. By maintaining the effect button device 40 in the second form in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, it is possible to have a configuration suggesting that the game state is advantageous to the player. ..

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect is executed in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, which are "advantageous states", but the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode are used. As long as the gaming state is more favorable to the player than the corresponding first normal gaming state, the application target of the fourth special effect is arbitrary. For example, in place of or in addition to the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the low probability mode, the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode. 3 It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the fourth special effect is executed in the normal game state A.

<Modification example 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect is generated not only in the game times related to the jackpot result but also in a part of the game times related to the missed result, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the fourth special effect is generated only in the game times related to the jackpot result, that is, the occurrence of the fourth special effect = the jackpot is confirmed.

<Modification example 4>
In the fifth embodiment, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, the operation suggestion is performed after a certain period of time after the operation of the operation button is enabled. That is, even if the operation button is operated before the operation suggestion is performed, the operation reception → operation correspondence effect can occur. This may be changed so that the operation suggestion is performed at the same time as the operation is enabled. Further, the operation suggestion may be performed after the operation is enabled only for a part of the jackpot result.

<Modification 5>
When the effect button device 40 is operated outside the operation valid period in the normal gaming state corresponding to the third display mode, the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form by the operation and is maintained in the first form. It is also possible to. As a result, it is preferable that the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 becomes difficult to check or the access to the upper plate 33 becomes difficult, and the player's impression of the fourth special effect deteriorates. Can be suppressed. When the operation is performed outside the operation valid period, the effect button device 40 may be switched from the first form to the second form at the game time in which the fourth special effect is executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode in a part of the second normal game state and the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, so that the game is advantageous to the player. The configuration suggests that it is in a state. Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated, but the number of balls held gradually decreases as the number of games is repeated. It is also possible to change the configuration to maintain the effect button device 40 in the second form when the game state (so-called small hit RUSH, etc.) in which the number of balls held increases (slightly increases) as the game progresses. .. With such a configuration, it is substantially unnecessary to replenish the upper plate 33 with the game ball during the game state, so that the second form is adopted while facilitating access to the effect button device 40. It is possible to preferably prevent the effect button device 40 from interfering with the progress of the game.

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment, when the normal gaming state corresponding to the third display mode is set, the mode of the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode, so that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The configuration suggests that it is, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of the normal gaming state corresponding to the third display mode, it is suggested that the gaming state is advantageous to the player by maintaining the above-mentioned second movable effect device 400 in the protruding state. It is also possible to configure the device. By configuring the second movable effect device 400 to switch to the non-protruding state by pushing down the player, it is preferable that the data display located above the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult to see in the island equipment of the game hall. It can be avoided.

<Modification example 9>
When the effect button device 40 is operated during the period in which the effect button device 40 is in the second form during the third display mode and the operation suggestion is not performed, the effect button device 40 is in the third display mode. May be configured to limit the return to the second form of. In the configuration in which it is suggested that the effect button device 40 functioning as the state suggesting means is in a gaming state advantageous to the player as described above, the effect button device 40 is operated silently or the like. If the effect button device 40 fails, the suggestion function will not be exhibited properly. This is not preferable because it causes a factor that impairs the reliability of the state suggestion function of the game machine (effect button device 40). In this respect, with the configuration shown in the present modification, the chance of the effect button device 40 being operated silently can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled (a predetermined validity period is set) when the first special effect or the like, which is an operation-compatible effect, is executed. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the operation of the effect button device 40 is always effectively received, and a configuration in which the operation during a predetermined valid period is differentiated so as to trigger the start / continuation / end of the special effect.

(2) The effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is configured on the premise of a downward pressing operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operation direction of the operation means for the effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the direction of the effect button device 40 may be changed from upward to forward so that the configuration is premised on a pushing operation to the rear of the game machine. Further, the configuration related to the operating means for the effect may be changed so that the pulling operation to the front side of the game machine is a prerequisite. For example, a lever-type operating means such as a joystick may be provided, or a rotary-type operating means such as a rotary switch may be provided.

(3) In the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, an urging member such as a spring for urging the button unit 720 is not provided on the side (upper side) away from the holder unit 750, but the holder unit. An urging member such as a spring for urging the button unit 720 may be provided on the side (upper side) away from the 750. In this case, by rotating the rotor 752 by the stepping motor 753, the protruding pin 747 attached to the movable base 741 moves in the engaging groove 772 of the rotor 752 and moves from the horizontal portion 775 to the inclined portion 776, thereby moving to the upper side. It is preferable that the button unit 720 is displaced upward by the urging force of the urging member after the displacement restriction to the is released.

(4) In the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, when the operation stroke of the operation button 721 changes with the switching of the first form / the second form, the operation is performed according to the change of the stroke. The configuration is such that the detection position changes, but the present invention is not limited to this. In either of the first form and the second form, the operation detection position may be the same. That is, instead of the configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position is the same in either the first form / the second form, the stroke amount to the operation detection position changes depending on the first form / the second form. May be.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, but the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified. The specific configuration for this is arbitrary. For example, a linear encoder may be provided instead of the rotary encoder 792, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) may be specified based on the detection information from the linear encoder. It is also possible to provide a position detection sensor such as a photo sensor or a magnetic sensor for each detection position and specify the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) based on the detection information from the position detection sensor. is there.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a stepping motor is used as a driving means for switching the effect button device 40 between the first form and the second form, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a motor other than the stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like can be used as the driving means.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is arranged on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, but the position of the effect button device 40 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, it can be arranged on the lower bulging portion 29, or can be arranged above or on the side of the window portion 22.

(8) Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the operation direction (operation method) is the same for all of the first to third embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the configuration in which the form of the effect button device can be changed, the operation direction (operation method) of the effect button device may be changed for each form.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and the relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 at least in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis CLX. However, the configuration is not limited to this. The outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 may be fixed to prevent the relative displacement.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the stepping motor is configured to generate static torque even under the situation of the first embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the first form, it is also possible to have a configuration in which static torque is not generated.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is arranged on the front portion of the front door frame 14, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to dispose the effect button device 40 on the side surface portion or the upper surface portion of the front door frame 14.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the variation display of the pattern on the operation port display units DU and DL and the symbol on the symbol display device 253 are based on the winning / failing lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. The configuration is such that the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the winning / failing lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display units DU and DL and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 253.

(13) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. An operating means (effect button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player, and
With the effect executing means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes the operation corresponding effect (for example, the operation corresponding effect such as the first special effect) based on the operation of the operation means during the predetermined operation valid period. It is a game machine equipped with
When a predetermined switching condition (development to reach display in the game times related to the first special effect) is satisfied, the form of the operating means is switched from the first form to the second form having an appearance different from that of the first form. Switching means (a function of executing a form switching process in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) and
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the form of the operation means is switched to the second form, the operation suggestion means (the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 suggests the operation of the operation means to the player). It has a function to execute the processing for
The effect executing means is
When the operating means is operated during the predetermined operation valid period and in the situation where the operating means is in the second form, a special effect as the operation-corresponding effect (first special effect). And the means to do
It has a period setting means (a function of determining the start timing of operation suggestion by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) for setting any of a plurality of periods having different lengths as the predetermined standby period. A game machine featuring.

If the operating means is switched between the first form and the second form as shown in the feature A1, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened and the operating means itself can be encouraged to pay attention to. Here, when the operating means becomes the second form, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the elapse of a predetermined waiting period from the switching to the second form. Since a plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as predetermined waiting periods, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second form varies variously. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length maintained in the second form. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (winning of operating ports 83a and 83b) executes winning processing for operating ports. Function to do) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The transition determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). Function to execute processing such as) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result (big hit result) that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is specially advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state. A game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the game state (open / close execution mode), and
An operating means (effect button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player, and
With the effect executing means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes the operation corresponding effect (for example, the operation corresponding effect such as the first special effect) based on the operation of the operation means during the predetermined operation valid period. It is a game machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When a predetermined switching condition (development to reach display in the game times related to the first special effect) is satisfied, the form of the operating means is switched from the first form to the second form having an appearance different from that of the first form. Switching means (a function of executing a form switching process in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) and
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the form of the operation means is switched to the second form, the operation suggestion means (operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) suggesting the operation of the operation means to the player. When the operation means is operated under the condition that the operation means is in the second form while the operation means is in the predetermined operation valid period, as the operation correspondence effect. Has a means to execute the special production (first special production) of
A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the predetermined waiting period is provided.
The effect executing means suggests an operation by the period setting means (MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) that sets any one of the different plurality of periods as the predetermined standby period based on the determination result by the transition determination unit. A gaming machine characterized in having a function of determining a start timing).

If the operating means is switched between the first form and the second form as shown in the feature A2, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened and the operating means itself can be encouraged to pay attention to. Here, when the operating means becomes the second form, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the elapse of a predetermined waiting period from the switching to the second form. A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as predetermined waiting periods, and the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second form changes variously based on the determination result by the transition determination means. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length maintained in the second form. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. As the predetermined period, a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided.
When the determination result by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result, the period setting means has a higher probability that the second period is set as the predetermined period than when it is not the transition correspondence result. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the feature A3, a player who desires to shift to the special gaming state can be expected to maintain the second form for as long as possible (so that it becomes the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in improving the degree of attention for switching to the second form.

Feature A4. As the predetermined period, a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is longer than that of the first period.

According to the feature A4, it is possible to prevent the difference in the predetermined waiting period from being buried and becoming difficult to understand.

Feature A5. The switching means is configured to switch the operating means to the second form as the predetermined switching condition is satisfied when shifting to the reach display.
The display effect executed after the transition to the reach display includes the first part and the second part.
As the predetermined waiting period, a first period specified in the first part to suggest the operation and a second period specified in the second part to suggest the operation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, characterized in that the game machine is provided with.

As shown in feature A5, if the operation means is switched to the second form with the transition to the reach display and the operation suggestion is generated in the first part and the second part after the transition to the reach display, the operation suggestion is generated. The player can estimate the period from the progress of the display effect without measuring the period maintained in the second form. By clarifying the difference between the first period and the second period in this way, the effects shown in the feature A1 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A6. The game according to any one of the features A1 to A5, wherein the switching means has a means for maintaining the operating means in the second form until the predetermined waiting period elapses. Machine.

Sudden switching of the operating means to the first form while waiting for an operation suggestion can be a factor that confuses the player. Therefore, when the operating means is switched to the second form as shown in the present feature, the above-mentioned inconvenience is preferably caused by the configuration in which the operation means is maintained in the second form until the predetermined waiting period elapses. Can be suppressed.

Feature A7. The operating means has a configuration in which the second form can be switched to the first form by the operation of the player.
If the operating means is operated after the switching to the second mode and before the predetermined waiting period elapses, the means for regulating the suggestion and the special effect by the operation suggesting means are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A6.

If the operating means is operated between the switching to the second mode and the generation of the operation suggestion, the operation suggestion and the special effect are restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player to wait until an operation suggestion is generated after switching to the second form, and to prevent the operating means from being operated by the dark clouds after switching to the second form. This is preferable in order to effectively exert the effects shown in the feature A1 and the like.

Feature A8. The operating means is any of the features A1 to A7, wherein the operating stroke of the operating means in the second form is configured so that the operating stroke of the operating means in the first form is long. The game machine described in one.

As shown in feature A8, if the operation stroke of the second form is larger than that of the first form, the operation means can be easily conspicuous while suppressing the complicated operation due to the change to the second form. can do.

Feature A9. At least in the period from the change in the form of the operating means to the suggestion by the suggesting means, the elapsed period corresponding display means for displaying the elapsed period corresponding display so that the display changes according to the elapsed period is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A8.

As shown in feature A9, it is preferable to display the elapsed period corresponding display so that the display changes according to the elapsed period in order to encourage the player to understand the game.

Feature A10. An operating means (effect button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player, and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation corresponding effect (for example, an operation corresponding effect such as a first special effect) based on the operation of the operation means. There,
Switching means for switching the operating means from the first state to the second state having a different appearance from the first state when a predetermined switching condition (development to reach display in the game times related to the first special effect) is satisfied. (A function to execute a form switching process in the MPU 902 of the notification / effect control device 143) and
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the state of the operation means is switched to the second state, the operation suggestion means (operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) suggesting the operation of the operation means to the player. It has a function to execute the processing for
The effect executing means is
When the operating means is operated in the situation where the operating means is in the second state, a means for executing a special effect (first special effect) as the operation-corresponding effect, and a means for executing the special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a period setting means for setting any of a plurality of periods having different lengths as the predetermined waiting period.

If the operating means is switched between the first state and the second state as shown in the feature A10, the impact of the operating means can be strengthened and the operating means itself can be encouraged to pay attention to. Here, when the operating means is in the second state, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the elapse of a predetermined waiting period from the switching to the second state. Since a plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as predetermined waiting periods, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second state changes variously. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the morphological change but also to the length maintained in the second state. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features A1 to A9 to the feature A10.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
The process for the first special effect is executed by the effect execution means (MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) that executes the operation-corresponding effect (for example, the first special effect for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means. It is a game machine equipped with (function) and
The effect executing means has a first effect (charak image CA) when the operation means reaches a first position (for example, a first detection position CP1) on a path in which the operation means is displaced by an operation toward the predetermined direction. A means for executing the effect EF) and a second position (for example, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection) on the back side of the first position in the predetermined direction after the execution of the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a means for executing a second effect (an effect of changing the effect EF) when the position CP5) is reached.

According to the feature B1, when the operating means reaches the first position on the path in which the operating means is displaced by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, the first effect is executed, and after the execution of the first effect, the first effect is executed. The second effect is executed when the operating means reaches the second position on the back side in a predetermined direction from the first position. In this way, if the first effect → the second effect are executed in conjunction with the operation of the operation means 1, an unprecedented novel effect is possible. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
The process for the first special effect is executed by the effect execution means (MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) that executes the operation-corresponding effect (for example, the first special effect for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means. It is a game machine equipped with (function) and
The effect executing means is
When the operating means reaches a predetermined position (for example, the first detection position CP1) on the path in which the operating means is displaced by the operation toward the predetermined direction, the starting means (notification) for starting the special display as the operation corresponding effect. (Function to start the second special effect in MPU 912 of the effect control device 143) and
At least a part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position (for example, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5) on the back side in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position after the start of the special display. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a changing means (a function of changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143).

According to the feature B2, the special display is started when the operating means reaches a predetermined position on the path in which the operating means is displaced by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, and the special display is started after the start of the special display. When the operating means reaches a specific position on the back side in a predetermined direction from the predetermined position, at least a part of the special display is changed. In this way, if the configuration is such that the special display is started and the special display is changed in conjunction with the operation of 1 of the operating means, an unprecedented novel effect can be achieved. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. When the operating means reaches the specific position after the start of the special display, the effect executing means maintains the special display as it is (the size of the effect EF additionally displayed by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized by having a function of maintaining the speed.

According to the feature B3, the special display is divided into a case where the special display changes and a case where the special display does not change when the specific position is reached. This is advantageous in suppressing the result of the operation from becoming monotonous and enhancing the attention-improving effect shown in the feature B2.

Feature B4. The changing means can change the special display when it reaches the specific position based on the displacement in the predetermined direction, and reaches the specific position based on the displacement in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, which is configured so that the special display cannot be changed in such a case.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the operating means is displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, such as when the hand is separated from the operating means before or after reaching the specific position, the change in the special display is rewound. Never. This is preferable in order to avoid an unintended change in the special display due to an operation error or the like.

In addition to or in addition to the configuration shown in this feature, "a configuration in which displacement to the side opposite to the predetermined direction is suppressed when the operating means is operated" may be used.

Feature B5. The changing means does not change the special display when the operating means reaches the specific position after a predetermined period has elapsed since the operating means reached the predetermined position and the special display was started. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B4, which is characterized by having a configuration.

In the configuration where the special display changes in conjunction with the operation, it is assumed that the impact of the display change will be stronger if the change has a certain sense of speed. Here, if a time limit is set for changing the special display as shown in this feature, the player is urged to operate the operation means at a stretch toward a specific position, and the above-mentioned impact enhancement is performed to the special display. The degree of attention can be suitably improved.

Feature B6. The specific position includes a first position and a second position on the back side of the first position in the predetermined direction.
The changing means
The first means for changing the special display when the operating means reaches the first position, and
Features B2 to feature B2 to include a second means for further changing the special display when the operating means reaches the second position after the special display has been changed by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B5.

As shown in feature B6, if the special display is changed in multiple steps by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, the expressive power in the change of the special display can be suitably improved.

Feature B7. A resistance generating means (a function of generating a resistance torque in the stepping motor 753) that generates an operating resistance when the operating means is operated in the predetermined direction is provided.
The resistance generating means is configured so that the operating resistance generated between the first position and the second position is larger than the operating resistance generated between the predetermined position and the first position. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature B7, by increasing the operation resistance on the back side in the operation direction, it is possible to prevent the change of the special display from ending excessively early and making the change difficult to identify.

Feature B8. The feature B6 or feature B7 is characterized in that the distance from the second position to the first position in the predetermined direction is larger than the distance from the first position to the predetermined position in the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

According to the feature B8, the grace period until the change of the special display can be gained toward the far side in the operation direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change from becoming difficult to identify due to the change of the special display ending excessively early.

Feature B9. The operating means can be switched between the first form and the second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form.
The feature B1 to the feature B8, which comprises a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed when the operation correspondence effect is executed. The gaming machine described in any one.

As shown in the feature B1 and the like, in the configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the special display are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by expanding the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. In addition, it is assumed that the operation of the operating means is often vigorously executed. In this respect, according to the configuration in which the operation stroke is extended in advance, it is possible to preferably suppress the change in the special display from becoming difficult to identify by gaining the display change period.

Feature B10. Information acquisition means (winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (winning for the operating ports 83a and 83b), and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The transition determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). Function to execute etc.) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening / closing) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is equipped with a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the execution mode).
A gaming machine in which a game effect is executed based on a determination result by the transition determination means.
An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
The operation-corresponding effect executing means (for example, the first special effect for the second part) that is the game effect based on the operation of the operation means (the first special effect is performed by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143). With a function to execute processing for production)
The operation-corresponding effect execution means
When the operating means reaches a predetermined position (for example, the first detection position CP1) on the path in which the operating means is displaced by the operation toward the predetermined direction, the starting means (notification) for starting the special display as the operation corresponding effect. (Function to start the second special effect in MPU 912 of the effect control device 143) and
At least a part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position (for example, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5) on the back side in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position after the start of the special display. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a changing means (a function of changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143).

According to the feature B10, the special display is started when the operating means reaches a predetermined position on the path in which the operating means is displaced by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, and the special display is started after the start of the special display. When the operating means reaches a specific position on the back side in a predetermined direction from the predetermined position, at least a part of the special display is changed. In this way, if the configuration is such that the special display is started and the special display is changed in conjunction with the operation of 1 of the operating means, an unprecedented novel effect can be achieved. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B1 to feature B9 may be applied to the said feature B10.

Moreover, each technical idea shown in feature B1 to feature B10 may be applied to the said feature A group.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a process for a third special effect by the MPU 902 of the notification / effect control device 143) that executes an operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation means.
It is provided with a monitoring means (position monitoring function in MPU 902 of notification / effect control device 143 and rotary encoder 729) for monitoring the position of the operation means by dividing the operation stroke of the operation means into a plurality of areas.
The monitoring means
A position detecting means (rotary encoder 792) for detecting which of the plurality of areas (first area E1 to third area E3) the operating means is located, and
The operating means has a period detecting means (a hold counter provided in the RAM 914 of the notification / effect control device 143) for detecting a period of stay in which the operating means is continuously staying in the area detected by the position detecting means.
The effect executing means includes a period determining means for determining whether the stay period detected by the period detecting means has reached the reference period (a function of determining the hold period in the MPU 902 of the notification / effect control device 143).
When it is determined by the period determining means that the stay period has reached the reference period, the operation corresponding effect executing means (notification / effect control device 143) that executes the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the area during the stay. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 902 has a function of executing a selection effect that constitutes a third special effect).

According to the above configuration, when the stay period operated (held) by keeping the operation means in any area reaches the reference period, the operation correspondence effect is executed according to the stay area of the operation means. The Rukoto. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by using the operation means.

Feature C2. The operating means can be switched between the first form and the second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form.
The game according to feature C1, wherein when the operation-corresponding effect is executed, a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form is provided before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed. Machine.

As shown in the feature C1, in the configuration in which the operation corresponding effect is executed according to the staying area of the operating means, each area becomes smaller and the difficulty of the operation becomes higher. It is feared that such difficulty in operation will hinder the effect of encouraging active participation in the game by using the operation means. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the operation means is set to the second form prior to the operation suggestion of the operation means, and the operation stroke is increased in advance, so that each of the above areas can be set large. It will be possible. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, which comprises a position information teaching means for teaching a player information indicating a relationship between the position of the operating means detected by the position detecting means and the area. Machine.

In a configuration in which the effect can be branched depending on the hold position of the operating means, it may be difficult to grasp the position of the operating means only by tactile information. Such difficulty hinders the subdivision of the area and the diversification of the production pattern. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably eliminated by providing the player with information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operating means and the area.

Feature C4. The period information teaching means for teaching the player the period information indicating the period detected by the period detecting means is provided.
Any one of feature C1 to feature C3, wherein the period information teaching means is configured not to teach the period information at the initial stage of stay when staying continuously in the area. The game machine described in one.

As shown in the feature C1 and the like, in the configuration of holding the operating means, there is a possibility that the operation means may move between the areas by slightly adjusting the force. If the period information is frequently reset due to such movement between areas, it gives the player an impression that it is troublesome, and there is a concern that the operation means will not be operated. Considering that it is necessary to adjust the force at the time of holding as described above, it is technically significant to have a configuration in which the period information is not taught at the initial stage of stay as shown in this feature.

Feature C5. The operating means is an elevating button.
As the plurality of areas, a first area (first area E1) on the upper limit position side of the operating means, a second area (third area E3) including the lower limit position of the operating means, and the first of them. It has a third area (second area E2) provided between the area and the second area.
Any of the features C1 to C4 characterized in that the size of the third area in the predetermined direction is larger than the sizes of the first area and the second area in the predetermined direction. The game machine described in one.

When holding the operating means, it is assumed that it will be difficult to hold the operating means in the third area between the upper limit side and the lower limit side due to the presence or absence of the guideline. In this case, it is assumed that the player who desires easy operation does not select the third area. Therefore, the above concern can be alleviated by configuring the third area so that the size in the predetermined direction is larger than the sizes of the first area and the second area.

Feature C6. A drag force generating means for generating a drag force that hinders the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction is provided.
The drag generating means can change the magnitude of the drag, and any of the features C1 to C5 characterized in that the drag generating means has a means for increasing the drag at the boundary portion of the plurality of areas. The game machine described in one.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it becomes easy to intuitively grasp that the person has moved between the areas due to the resistance transmitted from the operating means to the hand. This is preferable in improving the convenience of the player in the operating means.

Feature C7. A drag force generating means for generating a drag force that hinders the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction is provided.
The drag generating means is characterized in that the magnitude of the drag can be changed and has a means for changing the drag according to the length of the stay period detected by the period detecting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the monotonic operation can be suitably suppressed by changing the resistance during the operation.

Feature C8. An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
An effect executing means that executes an operation-corresponding effect based on the fact that the operation means reaches a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction.
A determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction is provided.
The determination position setting means can change the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction.
A game characterized in that when the operating means stays at a predetermined determination position set by the determination position setting means for a predetermined reference period, a special effect which is the operation corresponding effect is executed. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) so as to stay in any area, that is, when the stay period at the set predetermined determination position reaches the reference period, the operating means of the operating means. The operation response effect will be executed according to the stay area. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by using the operation means.

Feature C9. An operating means (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward), and
An effect executing means that executes an operation-corresponding effect based on the fact that the operation means reaches a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction.
A determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction is provided.
The determination position setting means can change the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operating means stays at a predetermined determination position set by the determination position setting means for a predetermined reference period, a special effect that is the operation corresponding effect is executed. ..

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) so as to stay in any area, that is, when the stay period at the set predetermined determination position reaches the reference period, the operating means of the operating means. The operation response effect will be executed according to the stay area. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by using the operation means.

The technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C9 may be applied to the features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means (winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (winning for the operating ports 83a and 83b), and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The transition determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). Function to execute etc.) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening / closing) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is equipped with a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (for example, a second normal game state B or a third normal game state B) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state). And are provided,
When it is provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and can be switched between the first form and the second form having a different appearance from the first form, and is in the second game state. A state suggesting means (effect button device 40) for suggesting to the player that the state is advantageous by being maintained in the second form over a plurality of game times in the second game state is provided.
The state suggesting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be operable at least under the situation of the second form.

According to the feature D1, it is suggested that during the second gaming state, the form of the state suggesting means provided on the front surface of the gaming machine becomes the second form, which is an advantageous state. Since the front part of the game machine is a part that is easier to see by other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device arranged on the back side of the game machine, it suggests a state provided on the front part of the game machine. By adopting a configuration that suggests the state by means, it is possible to preferably arouse the superiority complex of the player playing the game with the game machine.

Here, the state suggesting means, which is the second form, can be operated. In this way, if the state suggesting means can be operated in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means is good, and the state suggesting means becomes the second form in the second gaming state. It is advantageous in improving the degree of attention of.

Feature D2. Information acquisition means (winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions (winning for the operating ports 83a and 83b), and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The transition determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). Function to execute etc.) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening / closing) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is equipped with a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (third normal game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided.
It is provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14), and it is possible to switch between the first form and the second form having a different appearance from the first form. When the door is switched to the second mode before the transition to the second gaming state or with the transition to the second gaming state, and the game round is progressing in the second gaming state. A state suggesting means (effect button device 40) for suggesting to the player that the player is in an advantageous state by being maintained in the second form is provided.
The state suggesting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be operable at least under the situation of the second form.

According to the feature D2, it is suggested that during the second gaming state, the form of the state suggesting means provided on the front surface of the gaming machine becomes the second form, which is an advantageous state. Since the front part of the game machine is a part that is easier to see by other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device arranged on the back side of the game machine, it suggests a state provided on the front part of the game machine. By adopting a configuration that suggests the state by means, it is possible to preferably arouse the superiority complex of the player playing the game with the game machine.

Here, the state suggesting means, which is the second form, can be operated. In this way, if the state suggesting means can be operated in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means is good, and the state suggesting means becomes the second form in the second gaming state. It is advantageous in improving the degree of attention of.

Feature D3. When the state suggesting means, which is the second form, is operated in the second game state, an effect corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means related to the game times in which the operation is performed (fourth special). The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, which comprises an effect executing means for executing the effect).

When the state suggesting means (second form) is operated in the second game state, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination related to the game times in which the operation is performed is executed. Since the second gaming state is an advantageous state, there is an increased chance that the operation will generate an effect that is advantageous to the player. This is advantageous in improving the impression of the player on the state suggesting means and improving the degree of attention that the state suggesting means becomes the second form in the second gaming state.

Feature D4. The state suggesting means has a means for maintaining the second form until the end of the second game state after switching to the second form with the transition to the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D3.

According to feature D4, the second form may be maintained until the end of the second gaming state. This is preferable in order to secure an operation opportunity of the state suggesting means.

Feature D5. When a predetermined notification condition (for example, a big hit) is satisfied under the situation where the state suggesting means is in the second form, the notification means is provided to notify the player to operate the state suggesting means.
The state suggesting means has a configuration in which the second form is switched to the first form by the operation of the player.
A feature D1 to a feature D3 characterized in that the state suggesting means is operated according to the notification by the notifying means, and then a determining means for determining whether or not to return the state suggesting means to the second form is provided. The gaming machine described in any one of.

When the state suggesting means, which is the second form in the second game state, is operated according to the notification by the notification means, the subsequent forms are divided into the first form and the second form. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the operation of the state suggesting means.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "when a predetermined notification condition (for example, a big hit) is satisfied under the situation where the state suggesting means is the second form, the player is allowed to operate the state suggesting means. The state suggesting means is provided with a notifying means for prompting, and the state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second form to the first form by the operation of the player, and the state suggesting means follows the notification by the notifying means. When the state suggesting means is operated and the first notification condition (for example, the fourth special effect corresponding to the jackpot result) is satisfied as the predetermined notification condition, the state suggesting means after the operation The first form is the first form, and when the state suggesting means is operated according to the notification by the notification means, the second notification condition (for example, the fourth special effect corresponding to the deviation result) is established as the predetermined notification condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, characterized in that the second form of the state suggesting means after the operation is provided. It is also possible to say.

Feature D6. When the determination means decides to return to the second form, the return is delayed at least until the game round in which the state suggesting means is operated is completed. The gaming machine according to the feature D5.

By configuring the state suggesting means to delay the return until the operation of the game round is completed, it is possible to preferably suppress that the movement of the state suggesting means becomes a factor that lowers the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D7. The state suggesting means has a configuration in which the second form is switched to the first form by the operation of the player.
When the state suggesting means is operated during the period in which the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second gaming state and the notification is not performed by the notifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D4 to the feature D6, which comprises a limiting means for limiting the return to the second form during the second gaming state.

As described above, in the configuration in which it is suggested that the state suggesting means is in an advantageous gaming state, the suggestion function will not be exhibited well if the state suggesting means is operated silently and fails. .. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that impairs the reliability of the game machine (state suggesting means). Therefore, as shown in this feature, the state suggesting means is operated during the period in which the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second gaming state and the notification is not performed by the notifying means. In this case, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the configuration so that the return to the second form is restricted.

Feature D8. A launching means (solenoid 111) for launching a game ball into the game area (game area PE), and
A ball feeding means (ball feeding device 113) for sending the game ball from the storage area (upper plate 33) for storing the game ball to the launching means, and
A variable ball entry unit (lower operating port 83b and electric accessory 91) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which the ball is easier to enter than the first state.
A switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the first state and the second state, and
It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage area based on the ball entering the variable ball entry unit.
As the switching control mode by the switching control means, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the switching mode to the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode are provided.
The switching control mode in the second gaming state is the second switching mode.
The state suggesting means is any one of the feature D1 to the feature D7, characterized in that the second form is configured to have a larger amount of protrusion from the front surface portion of the game machine than the first form. The game machine described in one.

By switching the state suggesting means to the second form, the amount of protrusion from the front portion of the game machine becomes large. This is preferable for making the state suggesting means stand out, but it becomes difficult to access the back of the state suggesting means. Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the increasing restrictions on the arrangement of the state suggesting means will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention of the state suggesting means. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the state suggesting means is switched to the second form in the second switching mode in which the decrease of the game ball is suppressed, the state suggesting means is arranged around the storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state suggesting means from substantially interfering with the supply of the game ball. By relaxing the restrictions on the arrangement of the state suggesting means in this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

The technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D8 may be applied to the features A to C.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A movable effect device having a decorative body (for example, a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine, and a driving unit (for example, a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) for driving the decorative body. (For example, a gaming machine provided with a first movable effect device 300, a second movable effect device 400, a third movable effect device 803, and a fourth movable effect device 804).
Operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) and
When the operating means is operated, the effect executing means (MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) that executes the operation-corresponding effect (for example, the second special effects A to D) by operating the decorative body of the movable effect device. (Function to execute the second special effects A to D) and
When the operation-corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means, the player sets the movable effect device to be operated in the operation-corresponding effect before the start of the operation of the decorative body. (For guidance display by the light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, the light emitting units LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination unit 24, the interlocking display area CE of the symbol display device 253, and the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function to execute the processing of.

A configuration in which the operation-corresponding effect by the movable effect device is executed based on the operation of the operation means by the player is preferable in order to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, so that the movable effect device may be out of sight and the beginning of the operation-compatible effect may be overlooked. Considering that the operation-responsive effect is an effect that involves the movement of the decorative body and the impact at the beginning is strong, it is not preferable that such an oversight occurs in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation-corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable effect that is the operation target in the operation-corresponding effect this time before the operation of the decorative body starts. The device is taught. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight and preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive effect.

Feature E2. A plurality of movable bodies having a decorative body (for example, a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine, and a driving unit (for example, a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) for driving the decorative body. A gaming machine provided with a production device (for example, a first movable production device 300, a second movable production device 400, a third movable production device 803, and a fourth movable production device 804).
Operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) and
When the operating means is operated, the effect executing means for executing the operation corresponding effect (second special effect A to D) by operating the decorative body of the movable effect device for any of the movable effect devices. (A function to execute the second special effects A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143)
When the operation-corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means, the operation target in the operation-corresponding effect of the plurality of movable effect devices before the decoration starts the operation. Teaching means for teaching the player the movable effect device (light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, light emitting units LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination unit 24, interlocking display area CE of the symbol display device 253, notification / effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with (a function of executing processing for guidance display) on the MPU 912 of the control device 143.

A configuration in which the operation-corresponding effect by the movable effect device is executed based on the operation of the operation means by the player is preferable in order to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, so that the movable effect device may be out of sight and the beginning of the operation-compatible effect may be overlooked. Considering that the operation-responsive effect is an effect that involves the movement of the decorative body and the impact at the beginning is strong, it is not preferable that such an oversight occurs in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In particular, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become noticeable when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operation targets are used in combination. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation-corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable effect that is the operation target in the operation-corresponding effect this time before the operation of the decorative body starts. The device is taught. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight and preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive effect.

Feature E3. A plurality of movable bodies having a decorative body (for example, a movable body 360 or a decorative body 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine, and a driving unit (for example, a motor 381 or a solenoid 420) for driving the decorative body. A gaming machine provided with a production device (for example, a first movable production device 300, a second movable production device 400, a third movable production device 803, and a fourth movable production device 804).
Operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) and
When the operating means is operated, the operation corresponding effect (second special effect A to D) is executed by operating the decorative body of the movable effect device with any of the movable effect devices as the operation target. Means (a function of executing the second special effects A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) and
When the operation-corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means, among the movable effect devices, after the operation of the operation means is started and before the decorative body starts the operation. Teaching means (light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination unit 24, symbol display device 253) for teaching the player the movable effect device to be operated in this operation-compatible effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an interlocking display area CE and a function of executing processing for guidance display on the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143.

According to the feature E3, the configuration in which the operation-corresponding effect by the movable effect device is executed based on the operation of the operation means by the player is preferable in order to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, so that the movable effect device may be out of sight and the beginning of the operation-compatible effect may be overlooked. Considering that the operation-responsive effect is an effect that involves the movement of the decorative body and the impact at the beginning is strong, it is not preferable that such an oversight occurs in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In particular, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become noticeable when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operation targets are used in combination. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation-corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, this time from the start of the operation of the operation means to the start of the operation of the decorative body. A movable effect device that is an operation target in an operation-compatible effect is taught. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight and preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive effect.

Feature E4. An operation detection means (detection sensor 791) for detecting that the operation means operated by the player has reached a predetermined detection position (first detection position CP1) is provided.
After the operation detecting means detects that the operating means has reached the predetermined detection position, the effect executing means determines a predetermined start condition (arrival at the thirteenth detection position CP13 within the waiting period or a waiting period). The configuration is such that the operation-corresponding effect is executed based on the establishment of the progress).
The teaching means has a feature E3 having a configuration in which the teaching is performed from the time when the operation detecting means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position until the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Described game machine.

According to the feature E4, the operation target is taught from the time when the operation means reaches a predetermined detection position and the execution condition of the operation correspondence effect is satisfied until the start condition of the operation correspondence effect is satisfied. As a result, the effect shown in feature E3 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E5. The operating direction of the operating means is defined to be a predetermined direction.
The teaching means performs the teaching based on the fact that the operating means has reached a specific position (for example, the second predetermined position CP2 to the thirteenth predetermined position CP13) behind the predetermined detection position in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which comprises means.

According to the feature E5, when the operation means is operated in a predetermined direction, the execution condition of the operation correspondence effect → the instruction of the operation target. For example, even if a player who does not expect teaching stops the operation after reaching a predetermined detection position, the operation response effect is executed, so that it is possible to meet the needs of various players. That is, it is possible to reduce the chance that the teaching function gives the player the impression that it is bothersome.

In addition, when compared with the configuration in which the execution condition of teaching → operation corresponding effect is satisfied with the operation of the operating means, the operation is interrupted before reaching the predetermined detection position due to the exposure of the operation corresponding effect from the content of the teaching. It is advantageous in that it does not cause any inconvenience.

Feature E6. The teaching means causes the operation target to emit light by emitting light of a route connecting the operation means and the operation target so as to guide the player's line of sight from the operation means to the movable effect device which is the operation target of the present time. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E3 to the feature E5, which is characterized in that it is configured to teach the player.

According to the feature E6, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the motion target by emitting light from the route connecting the operation means and the motion target, so that the concerns shown in the feature E3 and the like are preferably dispelled. be able to.

Feature E7. The teaching means includes a plurality of light emitting points (first light emitting unit LT1 to 14th light emitting unit LT14 in the annular illumination unit 24 and an interlocking display area CE in the symbol display device 253) arranged on the route, and the operating means. It has a shift means for shifting the light emitting portion which is the light emitting target toward the movable effect device which is the operation target of this time, and teaches the player the operation target by shifting the light emitting target. The gaming machine according to feature E6, which is characterized in that it is.

As shown in the feature E7, the induction function shown in the feature E6 can be suitably exerted by the configuration in which the light emitting points arranged on the route are shifted.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the shift means shifts in conjunction with a displacement of the operating means toward the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the feature E8, by linking the movement of the operating means and the shift of the light emitting target, the player can arbitrarily control the shift speed while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

Feature E9. The operating means can be switched between the first form and the second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form.
The game according to feature E8, wherein when the operation-corresponding effect is executed, a switching means for switching the operation means to the second form is provided before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed. Machine.

As shown in feature E8, in the configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the shift of the light emitting target are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by expanding the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. In addition, since the operation of the operating means is often executed vigorously, the teaching period may be extremely shortened by the cooperation. In this respect, if the operation stroke is extended, the teaching period can be increased and the oversight of the teaching can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E10. Features E7 to E9 are characterized in that the shift speed of the light emitting portion by the shift means changes so as to be relatively slow on the operating means side and relatively fast on the movable effect device side. The gaming machine described in any one of.

As shown in the feature E10, if the shift speed is slow on the operating means side and the shift speed is high on the movable effect device side, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long and to preferably overlook the teaching. Can be suppressed.

Feature E11. The teaching means is configured to emit light at a light emitting point (second light emitting unit LT2) closest to the operating means among the plurality of light emitting points when the operating means reaches the predetermined detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E7 to the feature E10.

When the operating means is operated, it is highly possible that the player's attention is directed to the operating means in order to aim. Therefore, when teaching, the player's attention can be guided to the teaching means by first making the light emitting portion closest to the operating means emit light.

Feature E12. The light emitting portion to be shifted by the shift means is characterized in that a part of the operation means side is shared in each route connecting the operation means and each operation target. The gaming machine described in any one.

If the teaching routes are partially overlapped on the operating means side as shown in the feature E12, the initial light emitting points are common to all the teachings, and it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the start of teaching.

Feature E13. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E3 to the feature E12, which is configured to end the teaching when the operation-corresponding effect is started during the teaching by the teaching means. ..

According to the feature E13, by directing the player's attention to the teaching, it is possible to suppress an increase in the chance of overlooking the operation-responsive effect.

Feature E14. An operation suggesting means for suggesting the operation of the operating means is provided.
In either the first half or the latter half of the period from the operation suggestion by the operation suggestion means to the elapse of the operation valid period of the operation means, the teaching by the teaching means is performed based on the operation of the operation means. The following is described in any one of the features E3 to E13, wherein the teaching correspondence period is such that the other is a teaching non-correspondence period in which the teaching is not performed even if the operating means is operated. Game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player can select whether or not to teach by himself / herself without making the configuration excessively complicated. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player.

The configuration shown in this feature may be changed as follows. That is, "features E3 to E13 characterized in that the teaching start period in which the teaching is started by the teaching means elapses before the operation valid period of the operating means elapses. It is also possible to say "the game machine described in any one of the above."

Feature E15. The effect executing means is configured to execute the operation-corresponding effect by displacing the decorative body of the movable effect device, which is the operation target, from the effect standby position to the effect execution position.
The game machine according to any one of the feature E3 to the feature E14, wherein the effect execution position of each of the decorative bodies is configured so as not to overlap each other in the front view of the game machine.

Since the effect execution positions of the decorative bodies of the movable effect devices do not overlap with each other, there is a high possibility that the movement of the decorative body will be overlooked when the movable effect device that is not the target of operation is watched. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature E3 or the like to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress that the impact of the operation-responsive effect is reduced due to the oversight of the movement of the decorative body.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features E3 to E15 to the features E1 to E2.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E15 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to D.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 45), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the launching thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and each of these game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in a final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 14 ... Front door frame, 27 ... Speaker part, 22 ... Window part, 24 ... Ring lighting part, 40 ... Direction button device, 45 ... Game ball launch handle, 80 ... Game board unit , 82 ... Variable winning device, 83a ... Upper operating port, 83b ... Lower operating port, 87 ... Main display unit, 142 ... Display control device, 143 ... Notification / effect control device, 162 ... Main control device, 253 ... Symbol display device , 253a ... Display screen, 300 ... 1st movable production device, 400 ... 2nd movable production device, 602 ... MPU, 603 ... ROM, 604 ... RAM, 701 ... Operation block, 720 ... Button unit, 721 ... Operation button, 725 ... light emitting block, 741 ... movable base, 750 ... holder unit, 753 ... stepping motor, 785 ... lift mechanism, 791 ... detection sensor, 792 ... rotary encoder, 803 ... third movable effect device, 804 ... fourth movable effect device, 912 ... MPU, 913 ... ROM, 914 ... RAM, AR1 to AR8 ... Arrow image, CA ... Character image, CP ... Detection position, D ... Main display, DL ... Lower working port display, DU ... Upper working port Display unit, EF ... effect, LT1 to LT14 ... light emitting unit, TQ ... reference torque.

Claims (6)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A migration determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined migration information, and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The game state transition means to be made to
An operating means provided on the front of the game machine and operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation valid period.
The effect executing means is
A switching means for switching the form of the operating means from the first form to a second form having a different appearance from the first form when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied.
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the form of the operating means is switched to the second form, the operation suggesting means for suggesting the operation of the operating means to the player and the operation suggesting means during the predetermined operation valid period and said It has a means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated in the situation where the operation means is the second form.
A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the predetermined waiting period is provided.
The effect executing means is characterized by having a period setting means for setting any one of the different plurality of periods as the predetermined waiting period based on the determination result by the transition determination means. As the predetermined period, a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided.
When the determination result by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result, the period setting means has a higher probability that the second period is set as the predetermined period than when it is not the transition correspondence result. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured in. As the predetermined period, a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is longer than that of the first period. The switching means is configured to switch the operating means to the second form as the predetermined switching condition is satisfied when shifting to the reach display.
The display effect executed after the transition to the reach display includes the first part and the second part.
The predetermined waiting period includes a first period in which the operation is suggested in the first part and a second period in which the operation is suggested in the second part. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein is provided. The operating means has a configuration in which the second form can be switched to the first form by the operation of the player.
When the operating means is operated after the switching to the second mode and before the predetermined waiting period elapses, the means for regulating the suggestion and the special effect by the operation suggesting means are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above. At least in the period from the change in the form of the operating means to the suggestion by the suggesting means, the elapsed period corresponding display means for displaying the elapsed period corresponding display so that the display changes according to the elapsed period is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, which is characteristic.

Images